Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 4140 - Contract - Monterey Construction Company - Citibus Transfer Plaza - 05_13_1993
Resolution No. 4140 May 13, 1993 Item #24 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract by and between the City of Lubbock and Monterey Construction Company to provide new construction of Citibus Transfer Plaza, Lubbock, Texas, attached here- with, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Res- olution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this ATTEST: Betty o nso , City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: &k K4X-t�� is or i man, Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: 9_410a W4�_Pj�ev Frarold Willard, Assistant ity Attorney HW:js/ARTEXELE.RES D1-Agenda/May 5, 1993 i LUBBOCK TEXAS Cltl L�IJIJIJ�I�Wg' IJ l9WCaJ� P�Q�Q 1 MW M ARCHITECTS INC. LUBBOCK MIDLAND ROBERTS AND THOMA, INC. I CONSULTING STRUCTURAL e S " STRUC RAL ENGINEERS t AGNEW STORRS AND ASSOCIATES, INC. PR CT No. 1192-1 CONSULTING MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS HUGO REED AND ASSOCIATES, INC. k f CONSULTING CIVIL ENGINEERS 57 1 MARCH 1993 BID No. 12521 r- t RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract by and between the City of Lubbock and Monterey Construction Company to provide new construction of Citibus Transfer Plaza, Lubbock, Texas, attached here- with, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Res- olution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this day of 1993. ATTEST: Betty M. Johnson, City ecre ary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: q&tt Victor KiImW, Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: Harold WillaN, Assistant y Attorney ffW:js/ARTMMLE.RES D1-Aaonda/Hay 3. 1993 I�r 1 �� 1 'h'1• r � � tV ADDENDUM NO. 1 CITIBUS DOWNTOWN TRANSFER PLAZA PROJECT NO. 1192-1 LUBBOCK, TEXAS MWM ARCHITECTS, INC. APRIL 9, 1993 NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS: The following shall be incorporated in and become a part of the original drawings and specifications of the above referenced Project. Please acknowledge receipt of this addendum by noting it on your proposal. A. CLARIFICATIONS 1. With respect to when the "Notice to Proceed" will be issued for the General Contractor to "proceed" and therefore establish the date from which the 245 calendar days will start, it is the intent of the City of Lubbock to issue the "Notice to Proceed" only after the Demolition work is substantially complete. 2. Sheet SP-5 illustrates the landscape design as if Alternate #2 has been accepted. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that for the Base Bid the quantities of landscape planting material shall not be increased in magnitude but instead the spacing between the plant material shall be increased to cover the area of pavement that would be added under Alternate #2. 3. The Department of Labor has been consulted as to whether additional "wage scales" for those trades not listed in their General Decision, TX 930028 were: available. The City of Lubbock has been informed that no additional wage scales for these unlisted trades will be issued. 4. Page 12 of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT, Item 28D - It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that the amount left blank shall be equal to the total Contract Price which equals the total Base Bid plus accepted alternates. 5. Page 12 of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT, Item 28E - It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that if the Bidder and/or Contractor currently has in force a General Umbrella Liability Insurance policy that will cover this Project, then a separate policy does not have to be issued specifically for this Project as long as the minimum amounts and required endorsements are covered as required by the Contract Documents. 6. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that the Double -Sided Sign illustrated by Details 16/SP-3 and r 12/SP-3 shall be part of Alternate #1. 7. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that only one (1) door per pair in each vestibule will have the automatic door opener. Therefore, only two doors per vestibule will be automated which results in a total of eight' (8) aluminum entrance doors that will have automatic door openers (Refer Clarification Drawing #4). 8. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that the concrete footing shown on S5 for the "Vestibule Canopy" shall be 4 ft., 6 inches x 4 ft., 6 inches and shall be similar to Detail 6/S2. 9. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that "Fiber Mesh" reinforcing can, at the Contractor's discretion, be utilized in both the Bus Drive concrete work and the sidewalk plaza concrete work. 10. After review, the IRONSMITH model #M4894 Olympian Series tree grate has been determined to be equal to the specified NEENAH Model #R8710-180 tree grate. 11. After review, the U.S. INTEC, INC. CLASS A SBS Modified Roofing System including base sheet, fasteners, asphalt, BRAI/FLEX modified bitumen roofing membrane, BF-400-RS is approved as equal to those systems specified in Section 07511 of the specifications. 12. The "Citibus" sign shown on Sheet A4, Detail 2/A4 shall be cast into the concrete to a depth of one-half inch (1/2 inch). 13. After review, ACME BRICK'S modular 105 Wide Range j' (Flashed) Velour (with grog) brick is approved as an equal to the Type "A" brick listed in Section 04200 of the specifications. 14. After review, AMERICAN SPECIALTIES INC. toilet room accessories are approved as equal to Bradley units listed in Section 10800 of the specifications. B) IN THE SPECIFICATIONS DATED "MARCH 1993" MAKE THE FOLLOWING MODIFICATIONS: 1) Section 10950 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES, Part 2, Subsection 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS: Delete all of item "C" and add the following words "C. Provide six (6) 101b. A B C extinguishers. Five extinguisher units shall be housed in fire extinguisher cabinets. The remaining unit shall be surface mounted with appropriate brackets." I' f� P 2) Section 10950 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES, Part 2, Subsection 2.3, Item D after the word "points" add the r words "as manufactured by Landscape Forms, Inc. [ (800) I 521-2546] or equal." 3) Section 02514 - CONCRETE WALKS AND PAVING, Part 2, Subsection 2.1, after Item D add the following: E. Detachable Warning Strips shall be equal to and utilize the RAPIDCRETE "Retrofit System" (800) 446- i. 5338. C) ON THE DRAWINGS, DATED " 3/l/93 ," MAKE THE FOLLOWING MODIFICATIONS: 1. 1) On Sheet SP-1 delete all reference to "Existing Sign Removal" as shown on Drawing Modification #1. These signs shall be removed during demolition operations by others. 2) On Sheet SP-1 add eight (8) curb ramps (refer 2/SP-1) as shown on Drawing Modification #2• Exact Location(s) of these curb ramps will be verified in the field by the Architect. 3) On Sheet A-1 revise the configurations of the handicapped ramp landing railings as shown on Drawing Modifications #3. 4) On Sheet A-6 change the width of the Custodial Shelf/Mop sink alcove as shown on Drawing Modification #5. 5) On Sheet A-1 delete all special brick shapes and utilize r E field -cut brick to build the 45 degree corner as shown on Drawing Modification # 6. Also make rake the vertical joint at the 45 degree bend and fill it with sealant as j- required. 6) On Sheet SP-1 widen the Southwest corners diagonal sidewalk to eight feet (8'-0") wide by adding a three ,. foot (3' - 0") wide detachable warning strip with the required texture pressed into the concrete walk as specified. The detachable warning strip shall comply with Section 4.29 of the ADA Regulations as shown on .; Drawing Modification #7A. 7) On Sheet SP-2 widen the Southwest corner diagonal rsidewalk to eight feet (8'-0") wide as shown on Drawing Modification #7B. 8) On Hugo Reed Boundary, Topographical and Partial Improvement Sheet for Block 135 add the following note: "EXCAVATION AND/OR HOLES RESULTING FROM DEMOLITION WORK SHALL BE BACKFILLED AND COMPACTED UP AN AVERAGE ORIGINAL 7 GRADE OF 3194.0 FT." 9) On Sheet ES-1 make the modifications as shown on Drawing Modifications #8. 10) On Sheet ES-1 add the Concrete Base Detail as shown on Drawing Modification #9. All City street lights (Type M & Ml) shall utilize the City standard light base. 11) On Sheet ES-1 General Notes make the following modifications: Note D - delete the number "ll" and substitute in its I i place the number 113". Note E - delete the number 1112" and substitute in its �- place the number "ll". Note F - delete the number "12" and substitute in its OM F place the number "il". k 12) On Sheet E-1 (typical for Vestibules 100, 112, 114, and 120) add the additional junction box and conduit as shown r" on Drawing Modification #10. Exact location will be f field verified by the Architect. r- 13) On Sheet SP-3 delete Detail 10/SP-3. r 14) On Sheet SP-3, Detail 16/SP-3, delete the symbol and words " 0 82nd St./South Plains Mall" r Only twelve (12) double sided signs will be utilized in the Project. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 KA \� O O O 4 PDCPCRW (;PAVILION FLOOR PLAN SCALE. ►ir • r-O' RTPJ ROUOW 8000. "t1 oN ALL RAW 5�'ACTS ♦r Ow�NS10h1S N TLE ►wnp 50 M IMt9AM Sl Oom IS TR nCURB RAMP AT SI.=I 1 SCALE ►C • W / PA....., CONC. Fum, 1r UK_ PAAArm r 10. $OPD. A4 STEEL WIXAW TTTPJ s7m PPE (fW-17 W-01 C-O e-v A• r A• r �a 11 it 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 it If 11 11 11 OUARMAL Al e(70AOWAT A9E. :o OIA (TTo) GUARDRAIL ELEVATION STET t1w,-c PARKM smr go" TSEG oMWb tu D Z tLi EST 9ROADWA7 AVENUE S mEET Iti Ti aA;KI`!(i 9L•iN Ce51T ILW STKCi A .n .r.rr / _ �ELEC CQWw ALT. "61-01 e rTP Foe s A I • T /P� U h! �i �%Ua. . T r 1 11PE 7Tr. ALT. NO. 7• TeASN QECEPTCAL 11TP- MffP EO 17' Olk Fop 9 roe EKTm STL DOUAIe7S TTPCAL FOQ 5A ` IaND A WC hOcb DerrO$I X�r N X. Y�.'L17LL1CONC.C. SLAB /.t� W. 13TH STREET S""I OTE WAT" SITE PLAN NOS Tom_ PQOTECT ALL E45TNG "Ansms TO OEMA" AS QEQR SCALE I' • 20• Cr NOTE ALL (ATE Bub ORr.*S TO BE OVER B TIACc C.OWACTm CALAaAE BASE As SPEO'!O CORflACT4r r AWAQE 7rYT ACCCODNG TO TLE SOL QEPOPT• APPQO)WMTMT 1' rEfl BaOW ZWSTM !/eAOE 71ET✓E A A web POPIA&M. OF CALApE POOM S MET TO 7 FEET uloj . PEF" sot NYESTVATIOJ R"'MT OATm GA6M/ As POf9ATeTD eT Mile& [KM@P]. ►e. Q id QeLocATE oLS J 'ai[ EQ ELEC. mWclsl =1CAP - a s NI!W SE.-M r+NatllL DT owes tt pg A E 1S 0 P� 2 Aj r� U ®d W Z) Z ttJ Q Z; z n Y1SAeeJTT 4 r TEE (T-- AT ALL Ct)QWRSI Q ENr W 7 A zfffl tr1A. _ Q E 517N o 3 p y I �s+m o�<� n U �� 1A71A �i < c h N G N mjz cc G IxuQ PEV• NO. , 1112.1 oATc _ W NECT NO. S P-1 or [ 1 b r Q @Ltx i=:t QQ=SQ� s lE 21 U� r� #tam FC t _ NO r . O Z _ 7 o - C__l r if 1z � I'-; r --A 1 b am AVENUE liq 113 "Hn Ln Tn rn 6W €D f, ;oa " MWM ARCHITECTS INC. T �� < LUBBOCK LIMU mcit ROBERTS AND THaMA, INC. fDOWNTOWN TRAFBSRI M PLAZA + CONSUl11N0 STRUCTURAL EMgNCIRS AGNEW STORRS AND ASSOCIATES. INC. Lh7�tlDm�Cd, Tours CONSUONO UrCn Wlk/ELECTRCAL ENGINEERS 0 0 0 • . 4 � G Em • 0 • 4 O w ©OWN.-�... _ Jill i N MOW t1uffiii t_ • . •: �4lnaannna�ianaa—�'� �� -• 0°4� - ,�� �®®' � .. � . o © ��rn,�. �♦air � • .�'', as � • p � • � i INIINNIMNIMNI�IIIININIII/I/IINNI/III�N1111. 9I1111 M � • r .�.. •adnaandnna� �. = _ �wwlNlwwll wwINNlwwwwwmanmvuuNNl C _'� r, • f n � •• a .-0°q �Inuuauul�•..-crnln ndnaddadaaand': ,• � _nUtlnnadntllWan_nD�.'Ifadape `Oa11U=L�r' "ice � irrll• • I I� • • • • • : I I • • C • •, • - ��� y? ilk • T �� 1- ,��•�--:",n7KI�ZAI ALCOVE , %4..�•��=1111Fi� •_%r • • • : • • :� • • • : • ,� • • .� • N •� �„ • • od"vindurnnnuuaannnnnn ; "nQaarionaiionnnn. naW..�c:i nnm'nnnnnqunnnigi, � Ici • � o a o 00��. ♦ n o . • 0MECH cz STOP. _ n a 6 a'•. •, Q ,z118 Q Ifl • r'� • a � OC _I, Q • ,r,�p o f21:19 ® e • I / •• TO Ord rho mnnnn c o • • • a • r • ♦ • • Q III • O 1�.. 12 _;• y ri;®. `11 Role unannaunnonnnm.m.nu�nnnniinn .=' ♦ p � rrr' ,.:_ ��jaunnuunuoo...uumuouuumuuo� •ionnuuu.0 �a1w ci ni �CL NAM r _ =_O mnum�fi? • �• Z o " s n I a . 9 e 'Q a I a • C •• G a ©m�7® _ o a • o°,� �i tO�rr' 4Q� a O c • A�4 a • a • • d�.4/r rr ■ _ 0nnnuM:.nnnnnnnaugn O annaanu. nnngnn�„�»_tlnvn nn; ©11rA° p644 jln, fr., '`` •-1,, j.�.!=I pa'�'���•� ■ ill'' I U4 mIA�XH PE = ALL N BROK R5 2� e c2lzr'. f r 'F SEgtA ,� ti 111-115/8'► __> _D 3/8" WIDE W.C.J. AT lA/A-1 ROD AND SEALAN' AT lA/A-1 BRIG TOP WALL SEE STRUCT. FOR ..ROD AND SEALANT AT IA/A-I CUT CMU AS REQ'D REINFORCING (TYP.) (7A � HORIZ. JOINT REINF. (HORIZ. JOINT REINF. SI-IALL n D E T A I LAT A TERNA WG CORNERS 11'-115/8" DO Do CUT BRICK AS REQ'D .3/8" W. WCJ AT 2A/A-1 -ROD AND SEALANT BRICK RETURN AT TOP OF PARAPET W ROD AND SEALANT AT 2A/A-1 CUT CMU AS REQ'D 2 [DETAIL OSCONT OIUS AT WCJHALL CGS) r rXISTNG -IARKING IGN UPPED _ 7 SIGN r' `\ _9jp 1 r � °r `M4L _fit 6*-0' LONG 14ANDCAP SYMBOL PAMED ON PAVEMENT -� 4W. W. F STRIPE. Fk- 2//�'—DRAIN INLET \ STORN MANNC \-EXISTII\ STREE FTWN T'W 4.29 Detectable Warnings. 4.29.1 General. Dewctable warnings required by 4.1 and 4.7 shall ccaaply wish 4.29. 4.29.20 Detectable Warntngs on WaUdug Surfaces. Deecta bte warnls43 shaU emmist of raised awunted domes with a diameter qj nominal 0.9 trc (23 rrursl. a height gjnornbuai 0.2 of (5 rrvN and a eerUff-tocenter spacing qr nommial 2.35 to (60 rr W and shall contrast ulsually with adjotnbv surfaces. etcher light -on - dark or dark-on-UghL The matertal used to provUe conbust shall be an integral part gjthe uaalktryg surface. Detect- able uxuTt&igs used on interior surfaces shaU I differf m adlo&U8 ux&tng surfaces en rest!- tency or sound -on -cane contacL =: PRECAST CONC. FILLED CQNO-.-WPEEL PAINTED 12" DIAL ,/, STOP TYPICAL STL. BOLLARDS A .9Q_4_(2EEER TYPICAL FOR 54A�- 8/SP-3) (REFER STRUCT. 'p W. D�ffjac7A5LE T:e:/AYEu. �IJNOO PlJ�. MSIJ.II'sVCTKil1. L fi B r V Figure 2 Section thru Truncated Domes Figure 1 07 A Plan of Truncated Domes t SITE I ITE..PLAN E i PROTECT ALL EXISTING FEATURES TO REMAIN Ac, r NOTE: ALL CONCRETE_ BUS DRIVES TO BE OVE' v 20 W, AVENUE aftlo-lao-li 43'-4" 47'-8" OF PROPERTY j i I 1 / (d 0 S ACC-S 0' 36'-0" 8r-on �0- Id 70!1 W � 6'-3' >M �z A >�X\ 0 NA. z ��/ ,..ginn �- / /v, Z I T o BROADWAY G V %pM-m PNC 4 �Mir=A-20 I0 � PA -IS THM PHOTCcr- L PA-22 THM PROTOCELL cAmfrA,CTOR 'C9' a ACTOR 'CW DRA W/AO MOE)j;:rot#pMj * 8 SCALF-: ,r Q 2a - o• APDMM>f MO. 4 C17'BItS DOWNTOWN TP-A SF R PLAZA APRIL 9. 14M 04/09-193 13:38 9 3 ANCHOR 501_T8 *PACLG V0 DEGRffiMS APART Fri 1 1 1 ! COMMUT9 RISE 1 1 AGa"C0MT TO SERVICE DOOR aDoo6 2 _117 GIRGe bEARR'Id O1r4dMSiOM TO pC J. VE:PJ`=.a W/MAMU!"AGTURSR STUB GOMDUIT d' ASOYM rOOTM WAHPHOLE ANCHOR GROUND LUG b01_T COVER 4' MC9. MOM-614K hNC GROUT 604 ANGLE " UV 2/WESP HOLC L9YWL.1t46 MUT / WAAHtM: -�— I I GdRADC I I I ANCHOR SOLT6 I I by MAMUPAC'fURSR T' STUD d CAP OM SPARS COMM AT MACW POLE PVC I I COMCRL�'Tid SFiA!'"T' • COMaurT I I SIX 6ACx Mx RIG0 &TEEL I I 04 RdltiFORCCMEMT AT 42' O.C. COMDUI Y I ... r ' rv,� 4-06 RC woftCEMEMT DARA VERTICAL MOTE: COMGRCTE 9 KZ"FORGUt-ft T DY Or -MORAL COM"tACTOK .m t T, , 07, m R-I, DRAWIN6 MODIPICATWAI *10 _ .�. zi .. CrnWS DOWhTOW'h TRAHSFER PLAZA AMIL S. IM 71� i r- i LUBBOCKIN 0 0 0- �04 �0�-. 0 0 TEXAS altinug DOWHTTOWH `U'RA OFER PLAZA L' ubbioO ckv IJ I�WCofLJ -/o MWM ARCHITECTS INC. LUBBOCK MIDLAND ROBERTS AND THOMA,, INC. CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS AGNEW STORRS AND ASSOCIATES, CONSULTING MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS HUGO REED AND ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSULTING CIVIL ENGINEERS MARCH 1993 � 1-413 INC. PROJECT NO. 1192-1 BID NO. 12521 I CITIBUS 1192-1 TABLE OF CONT ENT S - S P SC I F I CATION S SECTION NAME NO. OF PAGES ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID ..................... 2 ... .................. NOTICE TO BIDDERS . 2 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TOBIDDERS........... 9 PROPOSAL .................................. 4 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS .................... 1 BUY AMERICAN CERTIFICATE .................. 1 DEPARTMENT AND SUSPENSION CERTIFICATE..... 1 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND .................... 2 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND ................ 2 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE .................. 2 CONTRACT ................................ 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT....... 26 FTA GUIDELINES AND REGULATIONS............ 22 PROJECT SIGN .... ...... .... ............. 1 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR - WAGE SCALES.... 9 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK ........................... 8 01023 SPECIAL CONDITIONS........ .............. 9 01030 ALTERNATES ................................ 2 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING ...................... 5 01300 SUBMITTALS ................................ 5 01400 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES .................. 3 01631 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS ..................... DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02200 EARTHWORK ................................. 10 02282 TERMITE CONTROL .......................... 3 02514 CONCRETE, WALKS & PAVING .................. 5 02810 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM ............. 5 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK ............................ 10 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 CONCRETE WORK........ ... .............. 19 03510 POURED GYPSUM ROOF DECK ................... 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 UNIT MASONRY.. .... .................. 14 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY .................. 5 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL ......................... 8 05210 STEEL JOISTS ............................. 4 05300 METAL ROOF DECKING ....................... 4 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS ....................... 5 DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY .......................... 6 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK.......... 7 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07312 CLAY TILE ROOFING ........................ 4 07511 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING .............. 9 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL ................. 4 07700 ROOF SPECIALITIES AND ACCESSORIES........ 4 07900 JOINT SEALERS ............................ 8 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.......... 6 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS....... 11 08710 FINISH HARDWARE .......................... 7 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING ........................ 11 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL .......................... 11 09300 TILE ............. 10 09510 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ............... 6 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING...... .............. 6 09900 PAINTING ................................ IR TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 I CITIBUS 1192-1 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10160 TOILET PARTITIONS ....................... 4 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES ............. 3 10950 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES ............... 6 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13130 METAL BUILDING COMPONENTS 6 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK ..... ................... 12 15100 SITE UTILITIES ........................... 6 15200 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES .................. 7 15210 PLUMBING SYSTEMS ....................... 9 15320 AIR DISTRIBUTION ......................... 15330 HANGARS AND SUPPORTS .................... 15500 EQUIPMENT .. � .. .... ......... 7 15600 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS ...................... 2 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16110 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS ................... 6 16115 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT .............. 4 16120 CONDUCTORS ............................. 4 16140 WIRING DEVICES .......................... 3 16150 MOTORS, EQUIPMENT, CONTROLS & WIRING .... 3 16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS ........... 2 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS .............. 2 16400 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ....................... 3 16450 GROUNDING ............................... 3 16460 DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS .................... 2 16470 PANELBOARDS ............................ 3 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES .......... 3 16500 LIGHTING ....... .... ............ 3 16720 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM.......... 14 16771 INTERGRATED PUBLIC ADDRESS ............... 7 16930 LIGHTING CONTROL ......................... 2 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS K, u r" i d ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS C' r d Sealed proposals addressed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Purchasing Buyer, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Agent, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 until 2:OOPM CDT - April 20, 1993 or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened by the Purchasing Buyer at his office and publicly read aloud. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Buyer for the City of Lubbock, Texas and MWM Architects, Inc., 2574 74th Street, Suite 201, Lubbock, Texas. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents shall be distributed from the office of MWM Architects, Inc., 2574 74th Street, Suite 201, Lubbock, Texas. Each Prime Bidder shall be furnished with two (2) sets of complete plans and specifications upon the deposit of $200.00 as a guarantee of their safe return. Mechanical and Electrical sub -contractors shall be furnished one (1) complete set of plans and specifications upon the deposit of $100.00 as a guarantee of their safe return. The full amount of the deposit shall be returned if the documents are returned in good condition within ten (10) calendar days after the bid opening. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the Schedule of General Prevailing Rate of Per Diem Wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Buyer of the City of Lubbock, Texas. Each bidder's attention is further directed to the provisions of the Davis - Bacon Act, and the requirements contained therein concerning such wage scales and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the U.S. Department of Labor. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive any and all formalities. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award. Further, each bidder's attention is herein directed to the Federal Transportation Administration (FTA) requirement that a minimum of Five (5) Percent of the total amount of the Work shall be supplied by minority, women, and/or disadvantaged business enterprises. _ You are hereby respectfully notified that this contract involves trenching more than five (5) feet deep and that the plans and specifications for this contract includes detailed glans and specifications for trench safety systems that meet Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration standards, and that these plans and specifications must include a separate bid (pay) item for these same trench safety systems. You are further notified and advised that if you are the successful bidder and your bid is accepted, you will be responsible for and are required by the execution of this contract to — conduct a safety program for this trench system including, but not limited to, the designation of one of your representatives at the job site to be in charge at all times of the implementation and maintenance of the trench system safety program during the life of this Contract. There will be a pre -bid conference on March 26, 1993 at 10:00 AM, CST, Committee Conference Room #103, Municipal Building, 1625 13th -` Street. BY: Ron ShWfield Senior Purchasing Buyer 11l" i NOTICE TO BIDDERS Sealed proposals addressed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Purchasing r ! Buyer, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Agent, 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 until 2:00 PM CDT - April 20, 1993 , or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened by the Purchasing Buyer at his office and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Ron Shuffield, Senior Purchasing Buyer for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the May 13, 1993 at the Municipal Bldg., Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder.will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of .100%. of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00 the said bonds will not be required. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the largest bid amount of this proposal submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. 11 r The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of Purchasing Buyer for the City of Lubbock, Texas and MWM Architects, Inc. 2574 74th Street, Suite 201, Lubbock, Texas. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Buyer of the City of - Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is herein directed to provision of the Davis -Bacon Act, and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the U.S. Department of Labor in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national origin in consideration for an award. Further, each bidder's attention is herein directed to the Federal Transportation Administration (FTA) requirement that a minimum of Five (5) Percent of the total amount of the Work shall be supplied by minority, women and/or disadvantaged business enterprises. There will be a pre -bid conference on March 26 1993 at 10.00 AM CST, Committee Conference Room #103, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street. CITY OF LUBBOCK ti Y:, lion SffiffiiAd Senior Purchasing Buyer 1, x GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work to be done under the contract documents shall consist of the following: The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. i All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents may be examined t. without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The bidder shall stipulate in his proposal the number of consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock that it will take him to fully complete the construction covered by the _ contract documents. 5. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidents incurred in the construction of the improvements F r contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of the contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be ; sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a. representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility. -of complying with this provision. The specification for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality 'which the Owner believesnecessary to procure a satisfactory project. 8. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a .written general guarantee which shall provide that :the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished such copies of plans and specifications,; and related contract documents as are reasonably necessary for his use during construction Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specification, to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work i whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid or not paid for such work, until the date the 7 i City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: a. The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the proposed contract and all work in rr progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. b. A sworn statements of the current financial condition of the bidder. C. Equipment schedule 11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be l; incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights, and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. 7 14. 15. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as`are currently utilized by persons, firms, or. corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 16. INSURANCE The contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall obtain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City and the Architects and his Consultants as an additional insured and shall further state that all subcontractors are named as additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. 17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidder's attention is further directed,. to the requirements of the Davis - Bacon Act statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: a. The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. b. Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of the project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property :or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 18. PAYMENT TO EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and�each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once a week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, a certified, sworn legible -,copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on eachday, rate of pay, and net of pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct- copy ..of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have. been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to -one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate.of per diem wages, which schedule in the contract documents The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of - Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, 'ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 19. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items -- required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered: 20. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL The bidder shall submit his proposalon forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes to do the work contemplated F r F 21. or furnish the material required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: a. Bidder's name b. Proposal for (description of project) Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal may be written or altered thereafter. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: a. Notice to Bidders b. General Instructions to Bidders C. Bidder's Proposal d. Statutory Bond (if required) e. Contract Agreement f. General Conditions g. Special Conditions h. Plans i. Specifications j. Insurance Certificates k. Addenda 1. All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 7 22. SOILS INVESTIGATION A soils investigation report is available for the site of this project, and may be examined at the office of Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbbock and at the offices of the Architects or Structural Engineers. Bidders should visit the site and acquaint themselves with the existing conditions. Prior to bidding, the bidders may make their own subsurface investigations to satisfy themselves as to site and subsurface — conditions, but such investigations should be arranged in advance with the Architect. 23. QUALITY ASSURANCE A soils testing laboratory and a concrete testing laboratory will be retained by the Owner to observe and test the work in connection with excavating, trenching, filling, backfilling, grading and concrete work. This Contractor shall cooperate with the testing labs in providing timely notice and access to the work. 24. FEDERAL REGULATIONS The bidders shall be advised that included in the Contract Documents are applicable Federal Regulations - some contain text and others included by reference. The Federal Regulations shall take precedence over and shall supercede any City or State Regulation. 25. MINORITY, WOMEN AND/OR DISADVANTAGE BUSINESS PARTICIPATION Each bidder's attention is herein directed to the Federal Transportation Administration (FTA) requirement that a minimum of Five (5) Percent of the total amount of the work shall be supplied by minority, women, and or disadvantaged business enterprises. 26. TRENCH EXCAVATION You are hereby respectfully notified that this contract involves trenching more than five (5) feet deep and that the plans and specifications for this contract includes detailed plans and specifications for trench safety systems that meet Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration standards, and that these plans and specifications must. include a separate bid (pay) item for these same trench safety systems. You are further notified and advised that if you are the successful bidder and your bid is accepted, you will be responsible for and are required by the execution of this contract to conduct a safety program for this trench system including, but not limited to, the designation of one of your representatives at the job site to be in charge at all times of the implementation and maintenance of the trench system safety program during the life of this Contract. BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PLACE Lubbock, Texas DATE April 20, 1993 PROJECT NO. 1192-1 Proposal of Monterey Construction Co., Inc. (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of the Citibus Downtown Transfer Plaza having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents, of which this proposal is to be a part of, is as follows: MATERIALS BASE BID:. (� -.- SERVICES BASE BID:- 2-, TOTAL BASE BID: Alternate No. 1: Provide an alternate price to associated with the steel frame canopies. delete all work ADD EDUCT ( ) Alternate No. 2: Provide an alternate price to add site paving as shown on the Drawings. D DUCT ($ ) i Alternate No. 3: Provide an alternate price to change Light Fixture "K" t fight Fixture "L". `Aalp . CT F i Alternate No. 4: Provide an alternate price to change the VCT floor finish in Alcove (101), (111), (121) and (122) and the Lobby (113) to a arry Tile floor finish. A D ($ +- DUCT ($ -r-- ) Alternate No. 5: Provide an alternate price to add four (4) Red Oaks, w (2) Honeylocust and -two (2) Cedar Elms as scheduled. Ann ($ V91DUCT ($ ) Alternate No. 6: Provide an alternate price to add millwork in r Dispatcher (103), Office (104),Office (110), Vault (105) and Storage i 09) • '� �Z��`ro ) UCT ($ ) Alternate No. 7: Provide an alternate price to add eleven (11) trash Pr ceptacles where shown on the Drawings. EDUCT ($ ) I 7 Alternate No. B: Provide an alternate price to add five (5) #2 benches ,here shown on the Drawings. DEDUCT ($ ) Alternate No. 9: If Alternate No. 5 is accepted, provide an alternate price to increase the size of six ( 6 ) Cedar Elms to 6 inch B & B, twelve (12) Red Oaks to 7 inch B & B and twelve (12) Shademaster Honeylocust tj:k,A inch B & B. DEDUCT ($ ) Alternate No. 10: If Alternate No.l is not accepted, provide an alternate price to change the standing seam metal roofing and "C" & "Z" purlins to a modified bitumen roof membrane with one inch thick insulation board on 1-1/2 inch metal deck and B inch x 4 inch steel tube purlins with all exposed metal surfaces painted as specified. DEDUCT ($ ) Alternate No. 11: Provide an alternate price to change Light Fixture �� to light fixture "L". eve DEDUCT ($ ) Alternate No. 12: Provide an alternate price to add two (2) curb ramps as shown by Detail 2/SP-1 as located in the field by the Architect after Award of Contract. R D ($ DUCT ($ ) 7 Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern. The undersigned acknowledges the receipt of Addendums Nos. 1 to the plans, specifications and contract documents. The undersigned agrees and pledges to complete the entire work in Two -Hundred, Forty -Five ( 245) consecutive calendar days after the issuance of a Notice to Proceed by the City of Lubbock. Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" from the Owner and to fully complete the project within the consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated elsewhere in this proposal. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $100.00 for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 20 of General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. s— The bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of forty-five (45) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. r The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check, Certified Check or a Proposal Bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the largest bid amount of this proposal, which it is agreed, shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. r F Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Moriter y Con truction Co., Inc. C ntr cto B Joseph F. Brozo, President (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: S cretary 7 i F LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS This form shall be completed and submitted with the Bidder's Proposal. 1 . sue. ��) �,r C' E / ; o�� %�c,,(,� 7%/4• �. 2.._ « T e 3. ✓.n.r- z �; 4. 6. 6. 7. 8. 9. la. Minority Owned Yes No X 7 7 BUY AMERICA CERTIFICATE The bidder hereby certifies that it will comply with the requirements of section 165(a) of the Surface Transportation Assistance Act of 1982 and the regulations in 49 CFR 661. Date L, . Lv • t Signatur Z- r I 6 Title or The bidder hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of Section 165(a) of the Surface Transportation Act of 1982, but it may qualify for an exception to the requirement pursuant to Section 165(b) of the Surface Transportation Assistance Act and regulations at 49 CFR 661.7. Date Signature Title DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION CERTIFICATE The bidder hereby certifies that it will comply with the requirements of the Department of Transportation regulations "Governmentwide Debarment and Suspension (Nonprocurement)" 49 CFR Part 29. Date 4, • iv S Signatur Z d Title or The bidder hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of the Department of Transportation regulations "Governmentwide Debarment and Suspension (Nonprocurement)"pursuant to 49 CFR Part 29. Date Signature Title 7 P" a CNA INSURANCE COMPANIES BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we MONTEREY CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. , Principal, and CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK Obligee, in the sum of FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID ---------------------------- Dollars ($------ 5%-------- ) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our legal representatives, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. for WHEREAS, Principal has submitted or is about to submit a proposal to Obligee on a contract CITIBUS DOWNTOWN TRANSFER PLAZA r` NOW, THEREFORE, if the said contract be awarded to Principal and Principal shall, within i such time as may be specified, enter into the contract in writing and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or contract documents with surety acceptable to Obligee; or if r' Principal shall fail to do so, pay to Obligee the damages which Obligee may suffer by reason of E such failure not exceeding the penalty of this bond, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. e Signed, sealed and dated MONTE EY C NSTRUC ON COMPANY INC. APRIL 20, 1993 (Principal) b Z (Seal) r' ONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY (Surety) I bKEVIN J. DUNN/ Attorney -in -Fact E G-23054•C CNA For All the Commitments You Make' Continental Casualty Company CNA IIIIIIN Fnr All iho-t nmmitn"-nn lint 1lHir AN ILLINOIS CORPORATION POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY•IN•FACT Know All Men by these Presents, That CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Illinois. and having Its principal office In the City of Chicago, an State of Illinois. does hereby make. constitute and so olnt Howard Cowan Mike Henthorn Ron Stroman, Cara Rogers, Pete Binageli, Min J. Dunn, Angie Goff, Mara Hill, inaivioually r of Lubbock, Texas Its true and lawful Attorney -in -fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute in its behalf bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature r - In Unlimited Amounts - and to bind CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by the t duly authorized officers of CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY and all the acts of said Attorney. pursuant to the authority hereby t given are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By -Law duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company. "Article IX —Execution of Documents l Section 3. Appointment of Attorney in -fact. The President or a Vice President may, from time to time, appoint by writtencertificates attorneys -In -fact to act In behalf of the Company in the excecution of policies of insurance, bonds. undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority, shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal of the Company thereto. The President or any Vice President or the Board of Directors may at any time revoke all power and authority previously given to any attorney -in -fact." This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company at a meeting duly called and held on the 3rd day of April. 1957, "Resolved, that the signature of the President or Vice President and the seat of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any power of attorney granted pursuant to Section 3 of Article IX of the By -Laws. and the signature of the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any certificate of any such power, and any power or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company. Any such power so executed and sealed and certified r, by certificate so executed and sealed shall, with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached. continue to be valid and bindino on the Company." In Witness Whereof, CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its Vice President and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed on this 24th day of November . 19 92 CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY ;v State of Illinois + i �a�•,, •\ County of Cook i ss > � SEAL i "•' J. E. Purtell Vice President. 24th November 92 On this day of . 19 . before me personally came r J. E. Purtell. to me known, who. being by me duly sworn. did depose and say: that he resides in the Village of Glenview. State of Illinois: that he is a Vice -President of CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument: that he knows the seal of said Corporation: that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to the said Instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporation. 7 .o NOTARY W Pusuc �Qt W Linda C. Dempsey N19Public. My Commission Expires Octob , CERTIFICATE �• I, Robert E. Ayo, Assistant Secretary of CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY, do hereby certify that the Power of Attorney h ref above set forth ly is still in force. and further certify that Section 3 of Article IX of the By -Laws of the Company and the Resolution of the Board ectors. set forth in said Power of Attorney are still in force. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the seal of the said Company this 20TH day of APRIL 19 93 vsw� _; �d•a.,, \ Royert E. Ayo Assistant Secretary Form 1.23142.8 INV. NO. G-574a3-c r� 1-CAfA io. All {a, comm,®ent.la. w,,. IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR TEXAS POLICYHOLDERS TO OBTAIN INFORMATION OR MAKE A COMPLAINT, YOU MAY CALL OUR TOLL -FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER 1-800-262.1113 ALSO YOU MAY CONTACT THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE TO OBTAIN INFORMATION ON COMPANIES, COVERAGES, RIGHTS OR COMPLAINTS AT 1-800-252-3439 YOU MAY WRITE THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE PO BOX 149104 AUSTIN TX 78714 9104 FAX (512) 475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim, you should contact your agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document G-53752-D42-D F'o-r All dwCummitmrncsYou Make* BOND NO. 800844581 I STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 71 ST LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION 1989 (McGREGOR ACT • PUBLIC WORKS) (Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of Contract Amount) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS. That MONTEREY CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. thereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY (hereinafter called Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound .unto CITY OF LUBBOCK hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ONE MILLION ONE HUNDRED SIXTY SIX THOUSAND ONE HUNDRED f SEVENTY AND NO/100------------------------------------------ DOLLARS(S 1,166,170.00 ) 70 the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 7jay of , 191, to BID #12521 — CITIBUS DOWNTOWN TRANSFER PLAZA �_ r� which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. r NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work m accordance with the plans specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect - PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended by Acts of the 71st Legislature, Regular Session, 1989, and all liabilities on this bond shall be f determined In accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this —LA— day of c r ONTE Y ONSTR ON COMPANY, INC4Principal) b LaLj12_ / EP F. BROZO, P SIDENT CONTINENT ASU C MPANY (Surety) by KEVIN J. D Attorn*OR-F30t. FG-23272-IB CNA For All the Commitments Vou Make' BOND NO. 800844581 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 71ST LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION 1989 (McGREGOR ACT — PUBLIC WORKS) (Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of Contract Amount) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That MONTEREY CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. FIN (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY t (hereinafter called Surety), as Surety, � are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK 7, (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ONE MILLION ONE HUNDRED SIXTY SIX THOUSAND ONE HUNDRED r SEVENTY AND NO/100------------------------------------------ DOLLARS($ 1,166,170.00 ) [ for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors r- and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the day of , 19�, to BID #12521 — CITIBUS DOWNTOWN TRANSFER PLAZA L Fwhich contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants 7 supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. 7 PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended by Acts of the 71st Legislature, Regular Session, 1989, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. I r- `s IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this day of Q, i La.2 , 19 14� we e G-23272-B ONTE)EY 0 NSTRUPfIN COMPANY. -INC. (Principal JPSEPH F. BROZO, PRESIDENT CONTINENTAL qAS41ALPC MPANY (Surety) by ZZ — — I D -Attorney-in-Fact r".w1VA P r ASI N� Comm.ttxn�+lw M�iv IMPORTANT INFORMATION FOR TEXAS POLICYHOLDERS TO OBTAIN INFORMATION OR MAKE A COMPLAINT, YOU MAY CALL OUR TOLL -FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER 1-800-262-1113 ALSO r YOU MAY CONTACT THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE TO OBTAIN INFORMATION ON COMPANIES, COVERAGES, RIGHTS OR COMPLAINTS AT 7 1-800-252-3439 1. YOU MAY WRITE THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE PO BOX 149104 AUSTIN TX 78714 9104 FAX (512) 475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim, you should contact r your agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved. you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. r ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: ! this notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. G-53752-D42-D r Continental Casualty Company .. CNA ( FnrAll rhrl,ynmunw"i,li u11nkr ,. AN ILLINOIS CORPORATION POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY -IN -FACT Know All Men by these Presents, That CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Illinois. and having Its principal office in the City of Chicago an State of Illinois, does hereby make. constitute andap dint Howard Cowan Mike Henthorn, Ron Stroman, Carla Rogers, Pete Binaaeli, Min J. Dunn, Angie Goff, Marla Hill, individually of Lubbock, Texas P+ Its true and lawful Attorney -in -fact with full power and authority hereby conferred to sign, seal and execute in its behalf bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature - In Unlimited Amounts - MN and to bind CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY thereby as fully and to the same extent as if suet instruments were signed oy the duly authorized officers of CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY and all the acts of said Attorney, pursuant to the authority herety given are hereby ratified and confirmed. .. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following By -Law duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company. "Article IX —Execution of Documents Section 3. Appointment of Attorney -in -fact. The President or a Vice President may, from time to time. appoint by writtencertificates attomeys-in-fact to act in behalf of the Company in the excecution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. Such attorneys -in -fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority, shall have full power to bind the Company by their signature and execution of any such instruments and to attach the seal of the Company thereto. The President or any Vice President or the Board of Directors may at any time revoke all power and authority previously given to any attomey-in-fact." This Power of Attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company at a meeting duly called and held on the 3rd day of April. 1957. "Resolved, that the signature of the President or Vice President and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any power of attorney granted pursuant to Section 3 of Article IX of the By -Laws, and the signature of the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any certificate of any such power, and any power or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company. Any such power so executed and sealed and certified by certificate so executed and sealed shall, with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached, continue to be valid and bindina on the Company." In Witness Whereof, CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its Vice President and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed on this 24th day of November . 19 92 CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY State of Illinois I if ca'rO'•�r County of Cook i ss J. E. Purtell Vice President. On this 24th �y of November 19 92, before me personally came J. E. Purtell. to me known. who. being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the Village of Glenview, State of Illinois: that he is a Vice -President of CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument. that he knows the seal of said Corporation; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal: that it was so affixed pursuant to the said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors Of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporation. aIII, . of A Z NOTARY m Puauc Linda C. DempsDey Public. My Commission Expires Octob 19, CERTIFICATE I. Robert E. AM Assistant Secretary of CONTINENTAL CASUALTY COMPANY, do hereby certify that the Power of Attorney h rei above set forth rce, and further certify that Section 3 of Article IX of the By -Laws of the Company and the Resolution of the Board ors. is still in foset forth in said Power of Attorney are still in force. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the seal of the said Company this day of .19 Ro rt E. Ayo Assistant Secretary p_S6 \aJ J SEAL . Form 1.23142•6 INV. NO. G-57443-B r- ata►i.��. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 'sgu6/10/93onr) �LUBBOCK, PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND j CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE THE INWEST GROUP, INC. DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE 6 DESTA DRIVE, SUITE 5550 POLICIES BELOW. •■MIDLAND, TEXAS 79705 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE LETTER COMPANY A UNITED STATE FIRE INS. CO. NsuRED COMPANY B LETTER UNITED STATES FIRE INS. CO. ONTEREY CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. LETTEANY C UNITED STATES FIRE INS. CO. P. 0. BOX 630 _ WOLFFORTH, TEXAS 79382 COMPANY LETTER D UNITED STATES FIRE INS. CO. COMPANY E LETTER COVERAGES.,. ..... �_ , ... ' j THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD j� INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REOUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. I Co TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER ILTR POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION DATE (MM/DD/YY) DATE (MMIDDNY) LIMITS ' - GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE i 2000000.. g COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY .543063578 _X 6/30/92 6/30/93 PRODUCTSCOMP,OPAGO. s 2000000, CLAIMS MADE OCCUR. PER8ONAL Q ADV. INJURY S 1000000 OWNER'S d CONTRACTOR'S PROT. _ EACH OCCURRENCE = 100000O. _ . _ __._ ._.. ..,__.., _ .... _......._ FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) S 50000 MED. EXPENSE (Any one pwmo S 5000 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE B X ANY AUTO 133611556 6/30/92 6/30/93 uMIT ..... 1000000 ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY S (' SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY i NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) _ . .,....__ .._..._ ... _..._...__..,.._ .._. _.__. GARAGE LIABILITY ..........._ L PROPERTY DAMAGE S EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S 1Q00ppQ C UMBRELLA FORM 5236359093 6/30/92 6/30/93 i+GGRE6i►TE w OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM D WORKER'S COMPENSATION 408524756 __. 12/23/92 12/23/93 X STATUTORY LIMITS AND EACH ACCIDENT ^ ` S , 500000_-'._.. DISEASE —POLICY LIMIT i. 500000_,_.. e EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY DISEASE —EACH EMPLOYEE i 500000 OTHER t i 'DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONSIVEHICLESISPECIAL ITEMS RE: CITY OF LUBBOCK - BID #12521 - CITIBUS DOWNTOWN TRANSFER PLAZA. ADDITIONAL INSURED IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK. CERT1EtCATE HOLDER .- = CANCELLATION r SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE CITY OF LUBBOCK EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO P . 0. BOX 2000 MAIL —0_ DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE TEXAS 79457 LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE i kACORD 25-15 (7190) CACORD CORPORATION 19901 DATE (MM/DD/YY) CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ISSUE6/10/93 ODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE E INWEST GROUP, INC. DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE 7H1 .o DESTA DRIVE, SUITE 5550 POLICIES BELOW. :MIDLAND, TEXAS 79705 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY LETTER UNITED STATES FIRE INS. CO. COMPANY ISURED LETTER B MONTEREY CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. LETTERCOMPANY G. "". 0. BOX 630 OLFFORTH, TEXAS 79382 LETTER COMPANY D COMPANY LETTER E :OVERAGES THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER I.Tk POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS DATE (MWDDNY) DATE (MMlDOlYY) GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE $1000000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY **FORTHCOMING ''X----0-'-W'N-ER'8 RODU'ii P AGG.' 6/10/93 6/10/94 P C, -9OMP;6' S CLAIMS MADE X -OCCUR. PERSONAL A ADV. INJURY $ CONTRACTOR'S PROT4 EACH OCCURRENCE S FIRE DAMAGE (Any am fire) $ MED. EXPENSE (Any one person) S AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE III ANY AUTO LIMIT ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY s SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY PROPERTY DAMAGE $ EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE III OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM STATUTORY LIMITS WORKER'S COMPENSATION EACH ACCIDENT AND ---- — ----- DISEASE POLICY LIMIT $ EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY DISEASE —EACH EMPLOYEE $ OTHER NAMED INSURED: CITY OF LUBBOCK P. 0. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONSNEMICLESISPECIAL ITEMS CITY OF LUBBOCK - BID #12521 - CITIBUS DOWNTWON TRANSFER PLAZA. HOLDER ,ITY OF LUBBOCK 0. BOX 2000 {LUBBOCK, TEXAS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 10 25—S 471901 79457 CANCE�LLN !I SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL.10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. CACORD CORPORATION I r r I r r F 7 F Pon 6 CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and MONTEREY CONSTRUCTION COMPANY.INCORPORATED of the City of LUBBOCK, County of LUBBOCK and the State of TEXAS, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID 012521 - CITIBUS DOWNTOWN TRANSFER PLAZA - IN THE AMOUNT OF $1,166,170.00 and all extra work a in connection therewith, underthe terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within TWO HUNDRED FORTY-FIVE (245) consecutive calendar days. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have year and day first above written. ATTEST: &"'t' . Secrete APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: J1,1PRil'ED AS 70 FORM: ATTEST: (LMd,dlak' 9,211t26,0 C dporate Secretary MONTE STRUCT ON COMPANY INCCORPORATED TITLE: _ COMPLETE ADDRESS: P.O. 6 Ce 30 w TX 793 8Z. xas in the 35 r GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or the expression of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the }cord Contractor, or the expression Party of the j' Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: MC)NTEREY CON5ML CO., INC,_, who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to John Wilson, General Manager of Citibus, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including the plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor, or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, r• General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), rr Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," 7 "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation, or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable 7 r or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. Whenever in the Specifications or drawings accompany this agreement, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the owner's Representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms, or clauses defining the character of the work. kI. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work ` on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary 7 for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of r- a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer r' such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all material furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. E r r 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles, and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. on the basis of his on -site observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the 3 work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract J documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc. shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his subcontractors, or his employee, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this agreement that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes to discourage litigation it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, decide every question -which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representative estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, _ which in the opinion of either party hereto is not in accordance with the meaning. and intent of this contract, either partly may file with said Owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direction of the Owner's Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be thereafter adjusted to arbitration as hereinafter provided. The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both. the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications, and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against 4 It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors, as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision. 16. CONTRACTOR'S_ DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 1 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and r. location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the 5 i. character, quality, and quantity of -materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed �'- preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the, execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under `this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever IA - the Owners's Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the -prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise r specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it 1" is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted.. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. - 20. SANITATION Necessary sanity conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from 'public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such a manner and at such points as shall be approved by the owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING U, The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide, proper 6 facilities and access for such observation andtestingat any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if -requested by owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at. Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for -Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then is such event of Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such- inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which- meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made .by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or L any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by.the owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forewith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans,- or, materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be .- understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. L It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written r. confirmation of such extra work order by the owner.. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the 8 following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15%) percent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies,. teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using loot, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve h extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner : s Representative ` insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order - 9 t and shall keep adequate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below provided. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agrees that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work is accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative.. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owner's Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five days- prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF THE OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing increase his force or equipment, or both to such an extent as to give reasonable -- assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workmen's Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable r. provisions of federal, state, and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other 10 F physical hazards shall be guarded in_accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state, or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carrier shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents, and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries of damages received or sustained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the.failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgement with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorneys fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as herein after specified. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $300,000 Bodily Injury and $300,000 Property Damage per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion &.Collapse Hazard .Underground Damage Hazard C� Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived) The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached .to the Certificate of Insurance. B. Owner's Protective or Contingent-. Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy naming the City of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows: For bodily injuries, including accidental death, $500,000 per occurrence, and $100,000 for Property Damage. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury $250/500,000 Property Damage $100,000 to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -Owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of (1,000,000 minimum) with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. 12 I The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of ,., Insurance. F. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance As required by State statute covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $100,000 r limit. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced., each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificateds of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered. as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the u insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. d(5) A provision that the policy may be cancelled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision thatL written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on certificate. ( 7 ) A provision that written notice shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES 13 Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual with regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN, AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT, AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all supplies, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any - indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay 'Al and discharge any such indebtedness within five ( 5 ) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES FOR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that -- Owner shall defend all suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material, or process is 14 ♦. r E allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the owner may enter into contracts, r. shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall r. not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. 34. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. 15 T" If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as a part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently form Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $ 100.00 PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the i time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the r. Contractor and,,the Owner, that the time for the completion of I the work described herein is reasonable time for the ` completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions r' prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the r Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is r., agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that the time is of the essence of this contract. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless �. otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that .. the conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as many as may r reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. PM 16 36. EXTENSION OF TIME The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walk -outs, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then submit such written request to the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their consideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as herein provided. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgement of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are 17 F intended to show clearly all work to be done and -material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and any materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property of properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claims or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work. ,40. PRICE FOR WORK f In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on all materials embraced in this. contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby �- agrees to receive such pricein full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents,. and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate - or payment be 18 considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not therefore been timely filed as provided in this Contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application or partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application ` for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor 1 up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value.of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into i the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage due Contractor. 43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE k Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been t completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed, on accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days 19 to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. 44. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of. the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st:day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract; _ and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's:Representative,_owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's Expense. 46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other -work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with a reasonable promptness. L 47 PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner may, -on account -of subsequently discovered evidence, 20 G { 1 t withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When'the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor_ provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 48. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owner's Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents. 49. ARBITRATION All questions of dispute under this agreement shall be r, submitted to arbitration at the request of either party to the dispute. The parties may- agree upon one arbitrator, otherwise, there shall be three; one named in writing by each party and the third chosen by the two arbiters selected; or if the arbiters fail to select a third within ten (10) days, heshallbe chosen by the District Judge, 72nd Judicial District of Texas. Each arbiter shall be a resident of the I City of Lubbock. Should the party demanding arbitration fail to name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall lapse, and the decision of the Owner's. Representative shall be final and binding on him. 21 Should the other party fail to choose an arbiter within ten (10) days, the Owner's Representative shall appoint such arbiter. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or information demanding in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both parties to take Ex Parte r- Proceedings. The arbiters shall act with promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties to the contract, unless `- either or both parties shall appeal within ten(10)days from date of the award by the arbiters, and it is hereby agreed that each party shall have the right of appeal and all > proceedings shall be according to and governed by Arbitration Statutes of Texas, being Article 224, et seq.,. Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITERS UPON ANY QUESTION SUBMITTED TO ARBITRATION UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE A CONDITION PRECEDENT TO ANY RIGHT OF LEGAL ACTION. The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party whose contention is sustained, such sums as they deem proper for the time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the appeal was taken without reasonable _ cause, they may award damages for any delay occasioned thereby. The arbiters shall fix their own compensation, unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbiters must be made in writing and shall not be open to objection on account of the form of proceedings or award. - 50. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owner's r` Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in �- writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving saidnotice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any ,machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies then on the'job, but the same, ` together with any material and equipment under.the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it .being understood that the _ 22 G use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to 'complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after the service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials, and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Represent ative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to -Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to fi 23 f complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the - Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies left on the site ofthe work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15 ) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 51. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the r_ Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the priced stated in the -attached proposal, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable_ price, and the amount of all Extra -Work performed at the priced agreed -upon, or provided for by term of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion,, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a -final statement of.the balance due:to.the Contractor 24 by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by I" the Owner, and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 52. BONDS The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceed $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of. Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not bet in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 53. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event, special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 54. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 55. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR f' Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of Contractor as an W independent contractor with respect?to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 56. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the workroom clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. I . FTA GUIDELINES AND REGULATIONS. This project is in part funded by the Federal Transportation Administration (FTA). FTA regulations require all grant recipients, contractors/subcontractors associated with projects funded in whole or in part to comply with all applicable FTA requirements and federal statutes/regulations including but not limited to the following: * Federal Transportation Administration Act of 1964, as amended, 49 U.S.0 1601 et. seq. * Surface Transportation Assistance Act of 1982,-_as amended. * Americans with Disability Act of 1990. * 49 CFR Part 27 - Elderly -and Handicapped * 41 CFR section 101-19.6 - Accommodations for Physically Handicapped. * 29 CFR Part 1926 - Safety Standards. * 40 CFR Part 249 - Use of Fly Ash in Procurement of Cement and Concrete. As per FTA guidelines, the following clauses/provisions shall be caused or required to be inserted in full by the contracting officer. LABOR PROVISIONS - CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS 1. Minimum Wages. a. All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be �a paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29CFR Part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section 1 (b) ( 2 ) of the Davis -Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are consideredwages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (a) (1) (iv) of 29 CFR 5.5; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR 5.5 (a) (4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: provided, that the employer's payroll record accurately set forth the time spent in.each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under paragraph (a) (1) (ii) of 29 CFR 5.5 and the Davis -Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. b. (1) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The .- contracting officer shall approve an additional. classification and wage.rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (a) The work to be performed by"the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (b) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (c) The proposed wage rate, including any bona " fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (2) If the contractor and the laborersandmechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and,the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the -- action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment -Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (3) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including theamount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30- day period that additional time is necessary. (4) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs (a) (1) (b) or (c) of 29 CFR 5.5, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification -- under this contract from the first day on which + work is performed in the classification. c. Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. d. If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. 2. Withholding DOT shall upon its -own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor C., withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federally -assisted contract r subject to Davis -Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanics, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction of development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, DOT may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such -- action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. 3. Payrolls and Basic Records a. Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be -- maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at �. the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in Section 1 (b) (2) (b) of the Davis -Bacon Act, daily and weekly number of ^ hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a) (1) (iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in Section 1(b) (2) (b) of the Davis - Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the -laborers or mechanics -. affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual costs incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration ^ of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and i i t . t , wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. r t b. (1) The contractor shall submit weekly, for each week ' in which any contract work is performed, a copy of all payrolls to the grantee. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely + all of the information required to be maintained under 5.5 (a) (3) of regulations, 29, CFR Part 5. r This information may be submitted in any form desired, optional form WH-347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the ,- Superintendent of Documents (Federal stock number 029-005-00014-1), U.S. Government. -Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by -all subcontractors. (2) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance", signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent ` who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: a. That the payroll for the payroll period (" contains the information required to be maintained under Section 5.5 (a) (3) (i) of regulations, 29 CFR Part 5 and that such ., information is correct and complete. b. That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in regulations, 29 CFR Part 3. C. That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicablewagerates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (3) The weekly submission of a -properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of optional form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" �^ required by paragraph (a) (3) (11) (b) of 29 CFR Section 5.5 (4) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 231 of Title 31 of the United States Code. c. The Contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a) (3) (i) of 29 CFR Section 5.5 available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of DOT or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to -interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor -or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the federal agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause -the suspension of any further payment, advance or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request -or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR Section 5.12. 4. APPRENTICES AND TRAINEES a. Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a state apprenticeship agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a state apprenticeship agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the �-- job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is _ performing construction on a project in a locality 1 i other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rates specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman's hourly rate: specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the r apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of ` fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringe benefits shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event -the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a state apprenticeship agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. b. Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR Section 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at -less than the y- predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which.has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ! ratio of trainees to journeymen on the site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every I trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's �. level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the Journeyman's hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall.be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not 1 mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be! paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage r determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and hour Division determines that there is an ` apprenticeship program associated with the �., corresponding journeyman's wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the r work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. c. Equal Employment Opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. 5. Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 18 U.S.C. 874 and 29 CFR Part 3, which are incorporated by reference. This act provides that each contractor or..subgrantee shall be prohibited from inducing, by any means any person employed in the construction, completion, or repair of public work, to give up any part of the compensation to which he is otherwise entitled. 6. Contract Termination: Debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR Section 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR Section 5.12. 7. Compliance with Davis -Bacon and Related Act Requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis -Bacon and related acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference. 8. Disputes -Concerning Labor Standards. Disputes arising out of the general disputes clause'of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. 9. a. Certification of Eligibility. By entering into this contract the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded government contracts by virtue of Section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR Section 5.12(a)(1). b. No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person.or firm ineligible for award of a government contract by virtue of Section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR Section 5.12(a)(1). C. The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. Section 1001. 10. Overtime Requirements. No contractor or subcontractor. contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any work week in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of eight hours in any calendar day or in excess of forty hours in such work week unless such laborer or mechanic received compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of eight hours in any calendar day or in excess of forty hours in such work week, whichever is greater. 11. Violation; Liability for Unpaid Wages; Liquidated Damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (b) (1) of 29 CFR Section 5.5, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such district or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (b) (1) of 29 CFR Section 5.5 in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of eight hours or in excess of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in subparagraph (b) (1.) of 29 CFR Section 5.5. 12. Withholding for Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages. DOT or the recipient shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any monies payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federally -assisted contract which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in subparagraph (b) (2) of 29 CFR Section 5.5. 13. Section 107 of C.W.H.S.S.A. is applicable to construction work and provides that no laborer or mechanic shall be �-- requested to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to F-' i i I— his health and safety..as determined under construction, safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor. These requirements do not apply to the purchases of supplies or materials or articles ordinarily available on the open market, or contracts for transportation or transmission of intelligence. �- 14. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert �. in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in subparagraph 1 through 15. of this paragraph and also a clause requiring the subcontractor to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts.-- The prime contractor shallbe responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in subparagraphs 1. through 15. of this paragraph.. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITYINONDISCRIMINATION Nondiscrimination During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: a. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, age, or national origin. The.Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, age, or national origin. Such action shall include but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection of training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provision of this nondiscrimination clause. b. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, age, or national origin. C. The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with.which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the said labor union or worker's representative of the contractor's commitments under this section-202 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and; applicants for employment. d. The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, as amended by Executive Order 11375, and with the rules, regulation, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. e. The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 if September 24, 1965, and by rules, regulation, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by the Federal Transportation Administration and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. f. In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses or this agreement or with any of the said rules, regulationororders, this agreement may be cancelled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part. The contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts of Federally assisted construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, as amended, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 if September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor or as otherwise provided by law. 9- The contractor will include a citation to 42 CFR 60-1 (b) and (c) and the provisions of paragraphs (a) through (g) herein, in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, as amended by Executive, Order 11375. such provision shall be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontractor or purchase order as the Federal Transportation Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance, provided, however, that in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the Federal Transportation Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance, provided, however that in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such litigation to protect the United States. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY/CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity construction Contract Specifications (Executive Order 11246): i. r 1. As used in these specifications: a. "Covered Area": means the geographical area described _ in the solicitation from which this contract resulted. b. "Director": means Director, office of Federal Contract 'Compliance Programs, United States Department of Labor, or any person to whom the Director delegates authority. c. 'Employer Identification Number": means the Federal Social Security Number used on the employer's quarterly Federal Tax Return, U.S. Treasury Department Form 941. d. "Minority" includes: (i) Hispanic (all persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, •-Cuban, Central or -South American or Other Spanish culture or origin regardless of race) (ii) Black (all persons having origins in any of the black African racial groups not of Hispanic origin) (iii) Asian and Pacific Islander (all persons having origins in any of the original people of the Far East, Southeast Asia, and the Indian subcontinent or the Pacific Islands); and (iv) American Indian or Alaskan native (all persons having origins in any of the original people of North America and maintaining identifiable tribal affiliations through membership and participation or community identification). 2. Whenever the Contractor, or any subcontractor at any tier, subcontracts a portion of the work involving any construction trade, it shall physically include in each subcontract in excess of $10,000 the provision of these specifications and the notice which contains the applicable goals for minority and female participation and which is set -- forth in the solicitation from which this contract resulted. 3. If the Contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60- 4.5) in a hometown plan approved by the U.S. Department of Labor in the covered area, either individually or through an association, its affirmative action obligations on work in the plan area (including goals and timetables)_ shall be in -- accordance with that plan for those trades which have unions participating in the plan. Contractors must be able to demonstrate their participation in and compliance with the provisions of any such hometown plan. Each contractor or subcontractor participating in an approved plan is individually required tocomplywith its obligations under the EEO clause, and to make a good faith effort to achieve each goal under the plan in each trade in which it has employees. The overall good faith performance by other contractors or subcontractors toward a goal in an approved -- plan does not excuse any covered contractor's failure to make good faith efforts to achieve the plan goals and timetables. 4. The Contractor shall implement the specific affirmative r. action standards provided in paragraphs (7) (a) through (p) of these specifications. The goals set forth in the solicitation from which this contract resulted are expressed as percentages of the total hours of employment and training of minority and female utilization the contractor should reasonably be able to achieve in each construction trade in which it has employees in the covered area. Covered construction contractors performing construction work in geographical areas where they do not have a Federal or Federally assisted construction contract shall apply the minority and female goals established for the geographical area where the work is being performed. Goals are published ` periodically in the Federal Register in notice form, and such notices may be obtained from any Federal Contract Compliance Program Office or from Federal Procurement Contracting Officers. The contractor is expected to make substantial uniform progress toward its goals in each craft during the period specified. 5. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement, nor the failure by a union with whom the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement, to refer either minorities or women shall excuse the Contractor's obligations under these specifications, Executive Orders 11246 and 11375, or the regulations promulgated pursuant thereto. 6. In order for the nonworking training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted in meeting the goals, such apprentices and trainees must be employed by the Contractor during the training period, and the contractor.must have made a commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the completion of their training subject to the availability of employment opportunities. Trainees must be trained pursuant to training programs approved by the U.S. Department of Labor. 7. The contractor shall take specific affirmative actions to ensure equal employment opportunity. The evaluation of the Contractor's compliance with these specifications shall be based upon its effort to achieve maximum results from its actions. The Contractor shall document these efforts fully, and shall implement affirmative action steps at least as extensive as the following: 4 a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, intimidation and coercion at all sites, and in all facilities at which the contractor's employees are assigned to work. The contractor, where possible, will assign two or more women to each construction project. The contractor shall specifically ensure personnel are aware of and carry out the contractor's obligation to maintain such a working environment, with specific attention to minority or female individuals working at such sites or in such facilities. _ b. Establish and maintain a current list of minority and female recruitment sources, provide written notification to minority and female recruitment sources and to community organizations when the contractor or its unions have employment opportunitiesavailable, and maintain a record of the organizations' responses. c. Maintain a current file of the names, addresses and telephone numbers of each minority and female off -the - street applicant and minority or female referral service from a union, a recruitment source or community organization and of what action was taken with -respect to each such individual. If such individual was sent to the union hiring hall for referral and was not referred back to the contractor by the union or if referred, not employed by the contractor, this shall be documented in the file with the reason therefore, along with whatever additional actions the contractor may have taken. d. Provide immediate written notification to the director when the union or unions with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement has not referred to _ the contractor a minority person or women sent by the contractor, or when the contractor has other information that the union referral process has impeded the contractor's efforts to meet its obligations. e. Develop on-the-job training opportunities and/or participate in training programs for the area which expressly include minorities and women, including upgrading programs and apprenticeship and trainee programs relevant to the contractor's employment needs, especially those programs funded or approved by the Department of Labor. The contractor shall provide notice of these programs to the sources compiled under (7) (b) above. _ f. Disseminate the contractor's EEO policy by providing notice of the policy to unions and training programs and requesting their cooperation in assisting the contractor in meeting its EEO obligations; by including it in any policy manual and collective bargaining agreement; by publicizing it in the company newspaper, annual report, etc:; by specific review of the policy with all management personnel and with all minority and female employees at least once a year; and by posting the company EEO policy on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at each location where construction work is performed. i r- a•j g. ' Review, at'least annually, the company's EEO policy and r-. affirmative action obligations under these specifications with all employees having any responsibility for hiring, assignment, layoff, termination or other employment decisions including specific review of these items with on -site supervisory personnel such as superintendents, general foremen, etc., prior to the initiation of construction work at +- any job site. A written record shall be made and maintained identifying the time and place of these meetings, persons attending, subject matter discussed, and disposition of the subject matter. h. Disseminate the contractor's EEO policy externally by including it in any advertising in the news media, specifically including it in any advertising in the - news media, specifically including minority and female news media, and providing written notification to and discussing the contractor's EEO policy with other contractors and subcontractors with whom the contractor does or anticipates doing business. i. Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written, to minority, female and community organizations, to schools with minority and female students and to minority and female recruitment and training organization serving the contractor's recruitment area and employment needs. Not later than one month prior to the date for the acceptance of applications for apprenticeship or other training by any recruitment source, the contractor shall send written notification to organizations such as the above, describing the openings, screening procedures, and tests to -be used in the selection process. j. Encourage present minority and female employees to recruit other minority persons and women and, where reasonable, provide after school, summer and vacation employment to minority and female youth both on the site and in other areas of the contractor's workforce. k. Validate all tests and other selection requirements where there is an obligation to do so under 41 CFR Part 6Q-3. 1. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and,evaluation at least of all minority and female personnel for promotional opportunities and encourage these employees to seek or to prepare for, through appropriate training, etc., such opportunities. M. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications, r^ work assignments and other personnel practices, do not have a discriminatory effect by continually monitoring r. all personnel and employment related activities to ensure that the EEO policy and the contractor's obligations under these specifications are being carried out. n. Ensure that all facilities and company activities are nonsegregated except that separate or single -user toilet and necessary changing facilities shall be provided to assure privacy between the sexes. o. Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of offers for subcontracts from minority and female construction contractors and suppliers.,.including circulation of solicitations to minority and female contractor associations and other business associations. P. Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisors' adherencetoand performance under the contractor's EEO policies and affirmative action obligations. 8. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations which assist in fulfilling one or more of their affirmative action obligations set forth in paragraphs (7) (a) through (p),. The efforts of a contractor association, joint contractor -union, contractor community, or other similar group of which the contractor is a member and participant, may be asserted as fulfilling any one or more of its obligations under (7) (a) through (p) of these specifications, provided that the contractor actively participates in the group, makes every effort to assure that the group has a positive impact on the employment of minorities and women in the industry, ensures that the concrete benefits of the program are reflected in the contractor's minority and female workforce participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual goals and timetables, and can provide access to documentation which demonstrates the effectiveness of actions taken on behalf of the contractor. The obligation to comply, however, is the contractor's and failure of such a group to fulfill an obligation shall not be a defense for the contractor's noncompliance. 9. A single goal for minorities and separate single goal for women have been established. The contractor, however, is required to provide equal .employment opportunity and to take affirmative action for all minority groups, both male and female, and all women, both minority and non -minority. Consequently, the contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a particular group is employed in a substantially disparate manner (for example, even though the contractor has achieved its goal for women generally, the contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a specific minority group of women is underutilized). 10. The contractor shall not use the goals and timetables or affirmative action to discriminate against any person because of race, color, religion, sex, age, or national origin. 11. The contractor shall not enter into any subcontract with any !- person or firm debarred from government contracts pursuant t to Executive Order 11246, as amended by Executive Order 11375. 12. The contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these specification and of the equal opportunity clause, including suspension, termination and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its implementing regulations by the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Any contractor who fails to carry out such sanctions and penalties shall be in violation of these specifications and Executive Order 11246, as amended. 13. The contractor, in fulfilling its obligations under these specification, shall implement specific affirmative action steps, at least as extensive as those standards prescribed in paragraph (7) of these specification, so as to achieve maximum results from its efforts to ensure equal employment opportunity. If the contractor fails to comply with the requirements of the Executive Order, the implementing regulation, or these specification, the Director shall proceed in accordance with 41 CFR 60-4.8. 14. The contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment related activity to ensure that the r-. company EEO policy is being carried out, to submit reports relating to the provisions herein as maybe required by the Government and to keep records. Records shall. at least include for each employee the name, address, telephone i numbers, construction trade, union affiliation if any, employee identification number when assigned, social security number, race, sex, status (e.g., mechanic, apprentice, trainee, helper, or laborer), dates of changes i in status hours worked per week in the indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work was performed. C-. Record shall be maintained in an easily understandable and retrievable form; however, to the degree that existing records satisfy this requirement, contractors shall not be �^^ required to maintain separate records. 1 15. Nothing herein shall be construed as a limitation upon the application of other laws which establish different. *� standards of compliance or upon the application of requirements for the hiring of local or other area residents (e.g., those under the Public Works Employment Act of 1977 and the Community Development Block Grant Program.) EEO/CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT NOTICE Notice of Requirement for Affirmative Action to Ensure Equal Employment Opportunity (Executive Order 11246): 1. The offeror's or bidder's attention is called to the "Equal Opportunity Clause" and the "Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications" set forth herein. - 2. a', The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the contractor's aggregate workforce in -each trade on all construction work in the covered area, are as follows: These goals are applicable to all the contractor's construction work (whether or not it is Federal or Federally assisted) performed in the covered area. If the contractor.performs construction work in a geographical area located outside the covered area, it shall apply the goals established for such geographical area where the work is actually performed. With regard to this second area, the contractor also is subject to the goals for both its Federally involved and, nonfederally involved construction. b. The contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4 shall be based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity clause, specific affirmative action obligations required by the specifications set forth in 41 CFR 60-4.3(a), and its efforts to meet the goals. The hours of minority and female employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the contract, and in each trade, and the contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from contractor to contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the contractor's goals shall be a violation of the contract, the Executive Order, and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed. 3. The contractor shall provide written notification' to the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs within 10 working days of award of any construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 at any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The notification shall list the name,. address and telephone number of the subcontractor; employer I', identification number of the subcontractor; estimated dollar amount of the subcontract; and the geographical area in which the contract is to be performed. 4. As used in this notice and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the "covered area", is Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas. DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE 1. Policy. It is the policy .of the Department of Transportation that disadvantaged business enterprises as defined in 49 CFR Part 23 shall have the maximum opportunity to participate in the performance of contracts financed in whole or part with Federal funds provided under this agreement. Consequently, the DBE requirements of 49 CFR .. Part 23 apply to this agreement. L 2. DBE Obligation. The recipient or its contractor agrees to ensure that disadvantaged business enterprises as defined in 49 CFR Part 23 have the maximum opportunity to participate l in the performance of contracts and subcontracts financed in whole or in part with Federal funds provided under this ►^ agreement. In this regard all recipients or contractors E shall take all necessary and reasonable steps in accordance with 49 CFR Part 23 to ensure that disadvantaged business ., enterprises have the maximum opportunity to compete for and perform contracts. Recipients and their contractors shall not discriminate on the basis of race, creed, color, national origin, age, or sex in the award and performance of DOT -assisted contracts. e r TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS ACT OF 1964 i Title VI Compliance ~ During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for P itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter r referred to as the "contractor"), agrees as follows: 1. Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination in federally -assisted programs of the Department of Transportation (hereinafter, "DOT") Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made apart of this contract. 2. Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, religion, color, sex, age, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by section 21.5 of the regulation, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. 3. Solicitations for Subcontracts, Including Procurement of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations, either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed under a.subcontract, including procurement of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, religion, color, sex, age, or national origin. 4. Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant.thereto, and shall permit access - to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities, as may be determined by the Recipient or the Federal Transportation Administration (FTA) _ to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information is required or a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information, the contractor shall so certify to the Recipient, or the Urban Mass Transportation, as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. 5. Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Recipient shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Transportation Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: -- a. Withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies, and/or, b. Cancellation, termination or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. 6." Incorporation of Provisions: The contractor shall include the provisions of..paragraph (1) through (6) of this section in every subcontract, including.procurement of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any.subcontract or ` procurement as the Recipient or the Federal Transportation Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such r. provisions including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however, that, in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Recipient to enter into such litigation to protect the interest of the Recipient, and, in addition, the contractor may request the services of the Attorney General in such litigation to protect the interest of the United States. BUY AMERICA PROVISION This procurement is subject to the Federal Transportation Administration Buy America Requirements in 49 CFR part 661. A Buy America Certificate, as per -attachment, must be completed and submitted with the bid. A bid which does not include the certificate will be considered non -responsive. A waiver from the Buy America Provision may be sought by the City of Lubbock if grounds for the waiver exist. Section 165(a) of the Surface Transportation Act of 1982 permits FTA participation on this contract only if steel, cement, and manufacturing products used in the contract are produced in the United States. CARGO PREFERENCE "The contractor agrees: 1. To utilize privately owned United States -flag commercial vessels to ship at least 50 percent of the gross tonnage (computed separately for dry bulk carriers, dry cargo liners, and tankers) involved, whenever shipping any equipment, materials, or commodities pursuant to this section, to the extent such vessels are available at fair and reasonable rates for United States -flag commercial vessels. 2. To furnish within 30-days following the date of loading for �., shipments originating within the United states, or within 30 working days following the date of loading for shipment originating outside the United States, a legible copy of a r rated, "on -board" commercial ocean bill -of -lading -in English j for each shipment of cargo described in paragraph (1) above to the Recipient (through the prime contractor in the case of sub -contractor bills -of -lading) and to the Division of National Cargo, Office of Market Development, Maritime Administration, 400 Seventh St. S.W., Washington, D.C. 20590, marked with appropriate identification of the Project. 3. To insert the substance of the provisions of this clause in all subcontracts issued pursuant to this contract. CONSERVATION Contractor shall recognize mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the State energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (42 USC Section 6321 et seq.).-. CLEAN AIR ACT AND FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT REOUTREMENTS Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable standards, orders, or requirements issued under Section 306 of the Clean Air Act (42 USC 1857 (h)), Section 508 of the Clean Water Act (33 USC 1368), Executive Order 11738, and Environmental Protection Agency regulations (40 CFR, Part 15) which prohibit the use under nonexempt Federal contracts, grants or loans, of facilities included on the EPA List for Violating Facilities. Contractor shall report violations to FTA and to the USEPA Assistant _ Administrator for Enforcement (EN0329). INTEREST OF MEMBERS OF, OR DELEGATES TO, CONGRESS In accordance with 18 U.S.C. section 431, no member of, or delegates to, the Congress of the United States shall be admitted to a share or part of this contract or to any benefit arising therefrom. CONFLICT OF INTEREST No employee, officer, or agent of the grantee shall participate in selection, or in the award or administration of a contract if a conflict of interest, real or apparent, would be involved. Such a conflict would arise when: a. The employee, officer or agent; b. Any member of his immediate family; C. His or her partner; or d. An organization.which employs, or is about to employ, has a financial or other interest in the firm selected for award. The grantee's officers, employees or agents shallneithersolicit nor accept gratuities, favors or anything of monetary value from contractors, potential contractors, or parties of subagreements. DEBARRED BIDDERS The Contractor, including any of its officers or holders of a controlling interest, is obligated to inform the Recipient whether or not it is or has been on any debarred bidders' list maintained by the United States Government. Should the contractor be included on such a list during the performance of this project, it. -shall so inform the Recipient. Certification as per attachment must be completed and submitted with the bid. A bid which does not include the certificate will be considered r7 non -responsive. PROJECT SIGNS The Contractor shall erect at the site of construction, and maintain during construction, signs satisfactory to the Department of Transportation identifying the Project and indicating that the Government is participating in the development of the project. ,PROTEST/APPEAL PROCEDURES Protest/Appeal procedures are as follows: 1) Requests for approved equals, clarification of specifications, protest of specifications, and proposal {- protest must be received by the City in writing, not less than fifteen full days before date of the scheduled opening of proposals. Any request for approved equal or protest of the specifications must be fully supported with technical data, test results, or other pertinent information as evidence that the substitutes offered is equal to or better than the specifications. 2) The City's final decision to requests will be postmarked at least ten full days before the date scheduled for opening of the proposals. 3) The Federal Transit Administration (FTA) will only t review protest regarding the alleged failure of the City to have a written protest procedure or alleged failure to follow such procedures. 4) If a proposer feels that a protest is necessary, in compliance with number 3 above, the protestor shall file a protest with PTA not later than five days after a final decision from the City is rendered under the City's protest/appeal procedures. In instances where the protestor alleges that the City failed to make a final determination on the protest, protestors shall file a protest with PTA not later than five days after the protestor knew or should have known of the City's failure to render a final determination on the protest. The City will give the protestor the mailing address of the FTA Regional Office when requested, for the filing of a protest in accordance with these guideline. A copy of the FTA protest must be sent to the City and also must include: Name -and address of protestor. Identify the City of Lubbock and the proposal number. Statement of the grounds for protest and any supporting documentation with detail of the alleged failure to follow protest procedures or the alleged failure to have procedures, and be fully supported to the extent possible. A copy of the local protest filed with the City and a copy of the City's decision, if any. 5) Following a protest, the City will not make an award of a contract without consulting FTA for approval. 6) Additional information on FTA protest procedures requirements are outline in FTA Circular 4220.1B. A copy of this circular can be secured by.contacting the City. 4T—O" Ir C:Citi DOWNTOWN TRANSFER PLAZA Lulblb®ck, Tonne LUBBOCK CITY COUNCIL TRANSIT ADVISORY BOARD IMYWt, MAD L LISCOON . 4w" GEUA CNNIYIN W.J. -MO ADMOI tm N UtER'SOK ;ACE OMtifim ALEx w COOKC "R ' wx RICE WADY WUDEULU MEW iECTW I.J. PATTERSON REV. DJ. SMM MAC" TRUD JD[ UTAYER AChW CM MWIMN. M7E CASS ASSKUNT CMY NANAOE7 ION KKLOPNDa $DWI , Al KAM M DMECTON OF TRMAPOAUITIQK WIRY NDTINAN DENEAK SWN.OEA Of CniBLM JDNN MLSON MWM ARCHITECTS, INC. .rao� RN �..... HUGO REED AND ASSOCIATES. INC. Oiw — M a-- VA�{.. W RDBERTS AND THOMA. INC. suuK N..en.. o.anR AGNEW STORRS a ASSOCIATES, INC. NwA.i ru..ry RICRLA RANtDi XYZ CONSTRUCTION Y�Wt W *Z IR0X= WS KEN M W"D THROUGH CR%4M M W M FEMAL TRANLT ADNRKMRI TRN PROLCT NO. TS-SD-N224. AND THE MAS KTMRTNEW OF TRANSPORIATOk COnRACT Ml W-EW-6032 AND INE WY OF WOBOCK CONSTPUCTION SIGN NOTES- 1 ) 3/4 INCH EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD, 2) TREATED 4"X4" SUPPORTS WITH ADEQUATE TREATED 2X BRACING; 3) BACKGROUND COLOR SHALL BE WHITE, 4) LETTERING COLOR SHALL BE BLACK, 5) STRIPES SHALL BE BLUE ON THE TOP AND TURQUOISE ON THE BOTTOM IN SHADES TO MATCH THE "CITIBUS" ROUTE MAP COLORS, 6) MOUNT THE SIGN AT THE HEIGHT SO THE BOTTOM OF THE SIGN IS LOCATED ABOVE THE TOP OF THE FENCES 7) PROVIDE TWO (2) SIGNS — ONE LOCATED ON BROADWAY AVE. AND THE OTHER SHALL BE LOCATED ON 13TP STREET AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT. General Decision Number TX930028 Superseded General Decision No. TX910028 State: TEXAS Construction Type: Heavy Highway County (ies) ECTOR POTTER TOM GREEN LUBBOCK RANDALL MIDLAND TAYLOR HEAVY (excluding tunnels & dams) and HIGHWAY PROJECTS (does not include building structures in rest area projects). Modification Number Publication Date 0 02/19/1993 TX93002S - 1 COUNTY(ies): ECTOR POTTER LUBBOCK RANDALL MIDLAND TAYLOR SUTX2037A 11/13/1991 ASPHALT HEATER OPERATOR ASPHALT RAKER ASPHALT SHOVELER BATCHING PLANT WEIGHER CARPENTER CARPENTER HELPER CONCRETE FINISHER -PAVING• CONCRETE FINISHER HELPER PAVING CONCRETE FINISHER STRUCTURES CONCRETE FINISHER HELPER STRUCTURES ELECTRICIAN ELECTRICIAN HELPER FLAGGER FORM BUILDER -STRUCTURES FORM BUILDER HELPER STRUCTURES FORM SETTER - PAVING & CURB FORM SETTER HELPER -PAVING & CURB FORM SETTER -STRUCTURES FORM SETTER HELPER STRUCTURES LABORER -COMMON LABORER UTILITY MECHANIC MECHANIC HELPER OILER SERVICER PIPE LAYER PIPE LAYER HELPER ASPHALT DISTRIBUTOR OPERATOR ASPHALT PAVING MACHINE BROOM OR SWEEPER OPERATOR BULLDOZER CONCRETE PAVING CURING MACHINE CONCRETE PAVING FINISHING MACHINE CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALER CONCRETE PAVING SAW CONCRETE PAVING SPREADER REINFORCING STEEL MACHINE SLIPFORM MACHINE OPERATOR CRANE, CLAMSHELL, BACKHOE DERRICK, DRAGLINE, SHOVEL LESS THAN 1 1/ 2 C. Y. CRANE, CLAMSHELL, 5ACKHOE DERRICK, DRAGLINE, SHOVEL 1 1/2 C... & OVER CRUSHER ORSCREENING PUNNT TOM GREEN Rates $7.467 7.267 6.400 9.799 8.153 6.881 7.496 6.500 8.148 6.987 10.000 9.500 5.500 8.021 7.000 8.300 6.307 7.839 6.479 6.018 7.102 10.282 8.000 8.233 7.823 7.000 6.250 7.972 8.187 6.411 7.963 9.100 8.075 7.750 10.063 9.100 6.500 9.000 8.574 10.043 Fringes OPERATOR 7.500 �.. FOUNDATION DRILL OPERATOR CRAWLER MOUNTED 9.000 FOUNDATION DRILL OPERATOR TRUCK MOUNTED 10.750 r FOUNDATION DRILL OPERATOR ! HELPER 7.050 FRONT END LOADER - 2 1/2 C.Y. r & LESS 7.458 FRONT END LOADER - OVER 2 1/2 C.Y. 7.669 r, HOIST - DOUBLE DRUM 8.100 I MOTOR GRADER OPERATOR - FINE GRADE 10.343 MOTOR GRADER 9.835 PAVEMENT MARKING MACHINE 9.150 PLANER OPERATOR 10.458 ROLLER, STEEL WHEEL PLANT ^� MIX PAVEMENTS 6.828 ROLLER, STEEL WHEEL OTHER, FLATWHEEL OR TAMPING 6.474 .. ROLLER, PNEUMATIC SELF-PROPELLED 6.455 SCRAPER-1.7 C.Y. & LESS 7.546 SCRAPER -OVER 17 C.Y. 7.655 SIDE BOOM 6.350 TRACTOR -CRAWLER TYPE 150 HP AND LESS 7.290 _. TRACTOR -CRAWLER TYPE OVER 150 HP 10.750 TRACTOR - PNEUMATIC 7.422 REINFORCING STEEL SETTER ., PAVING 7.926 REINFORCING STEEL SETTER STRUCTURES 9.086 REINFORCING STEEL SETTER �. HELPER 7.772 STEEL WORKER - STRUCTURAL 9.000 STEEL WORKER HELPER STRUCTURAL 6.250 SPREADER BOX OPERATOR 7.332 BARRICADE SERVICER WORK ZONE 6.500 TRUCK DRIVER -SINGLE AXLE LIGHT 6.592 TRUCK DRIVER -SINGLE AXLE HEAVY 6.791 TRUCK DRIVER -TANDEM AXLE SEMI TRAILER 7.130 TRUCK DRIVER-LOWBOY/FLOAT 8.868 TRUCK DRIVER -TRANSIT MIX 6.891 WELDER 11.827 WELDER HELPER --------------------------------------------------------------- 8.290 Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29 CFR TX930028 - 3 5. 5 (a) l (ii)) . END OF GENERAL DECISION TX930028 - 4 f General Decision Number TX930015 Superseded General Decision No. TX910015 State: TEXAS Construction Type: r- Building g, County(ies): LUBBOCK BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include residential construction consisting of single family 'homes and apartments up ... to and including 4 stories). (Use current heavy & highway general wage determination for Paving & Utilities Incidental to Building Construction). Modification Number Publication Date 0 02/19/1993 r I t l t T%930015 - 1 COUNTY(ies): LUBBOCK CARP1884A 07/01/1988 Rates Fringes CARPENTERS 12.50 2.73 MILLWRIGHTS 13.00 2.73 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELECO850A 01/01/1991 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIANS ---------------------------------------------------------------- 13.25 2.50+3.250 — PLUM0629A 06/01/1989 Rates Fringes PLUMBERS: Mechanical contracts over $150,000 15.00 1.59 Mechanical contracts — $150,000 or less ---------------------------------------------------------------- 10.50 1.59 SFTX0669A 04/01/1991 Rates Fringes SPRINKLER FITTERS 18.20 4.65 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2048A 03/16/1992 Rates Fringes '- ACOUSTICAL CEILING AND DRYWALL MECHANICS 10.00, .25 BRICKLAYERS 11.74 -- GLAZIERS 9.50 LABORERS 5.95 LATHERS 11.17 _ MASON TENDERS 6.25 PAINTERS 10.50 PLASTERERS 11.17 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS: Backhoe 10.50 .42 ROOFERS 9.71 SHEET METAL WORKERS (Including - duct work) 8.80 .69 -----------=----------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for the craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ---------------------------------------------------------------- Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only r TX930015 - 2 as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29 CFR 5.5 (a) 1(ii)) . END OF GENERAL DECISION TX930015 — 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 F SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The Project includes the construction of new bus parking and driveways, landscaped plazas, pavilions, canopies and an enclosed building housing lobby, operational and public facilities for the City of Lubbock as shown on contract documents prepared by MWM Architects, Inc., dated 3-1-93 . The work consists of the following: 1. New building structure, canopies and entry pavilions constructed on a site cleared by others. 2. Site work including pedestrian landscaped plazas, bus drives and parking, perimeter curbs and gutters with new sidewalks. 3. All necessary permits required for the work. 1.3. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. It is anticipated that this work may commence by June 1, 1993, all as shown on the Drawings. 1.4. WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. A separate contract has been issued by the City of Lubbock to perform building and site demolition operations at the site. Those operations precede and are scheduled to be substantially complete as indicated below. That Contract includes: 1. Building demolition — substantially complete, approximately, June 21, 1993 . 2. Site demolition - substantially complete, approximately, June 21, 1993 B. The City of Lubbock has made contractual arrangements with the following Utility Entities or Departments to SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 relocate, reroute and/or remove all utilities that traverse the site: 1. Water Department - substantially complete, approximately, July 30, 1993 . 2. Sewer Department - substantially complete, approximately, July 30, 1993 . 3. Lubbock Power & Light - substantially complete, approximately, July 30, 1993 . 4. Southwestern Public Service substantially complete, approximately, July 30, 1993 5. Southwestern Bell Telephone Co. - substantially 'complete, approximately, July 30, 1993 Portions of Southwestern Bell Telephone Company's cables will remain on and transverse the site in an East to West direction. 6. Energas - substantially complete, approximately, July 30, 1993 7. Traffic Department — substantially complete, approximately, July 30, 1993 . C. See Construction Schedule Bar Chart requirements in SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS. 1.5. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. General: Limit use of premises to construction activities in areas indicated; allow for Owner Occupancy and use by the public at the perimeter of the site. All outside storage shall be limited to the areas shown within the Limits of Construction as shown on the drawings. 1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated by the edge of perimeter curb/gutter line. Portions of the site beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed. The Contractor shall erect and maintain in good condition a construction fence encompassing the Contract limits. Fence shall be a minimum of sixty inches (60") high and shall have a maximum opening of six (6"). Posts shall be sturdy and gates shall be provided as required. At Substantial Completion this Contractor shall remove the fence and leave the site in the same condition as it was before construction operations began. 2. The Contractor shall cooperate with other Contractors on the site to ensure that. all operations are maintained with no interruptions. 01010 - 2 SUMMARY OF WORK r F CITIBUS 1192-1 3. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner, and other contractors at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. 1.6. OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy the site during part of the entire construction period. Cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building, prior to Substantial Completion provided that such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner occupancy. 2. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy the Owner will provide operation and maintenance of mechanical and electrical systems in occupied portions of the building. 1.7. PROJECT CLOSEOUT: A. Project As -Built Documents: The Contractor shall keep a record set of drawings, specifications and all submittal data on the job at all times. Record of miscellaneous changes or job adjustments (whether or not included in a Change Order) shall be recorded by the General Contractor for all trades and sub- contracts. At job closeout two sets of As -Built documents shall be submitted for review and acceptance. Final payment will not be made until the As -Built Documents have been accepted. Do not use the As -Built documents for construction reference and use. B. As noted in General Conditions the contractor shall furnish releases and waiver of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract before final payment. r SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 3 r CITIBUS 1192-1 Releases from all sub -contractors and suppliers shall be required. 1.8. SITE INVESTIGATION: A. It is required that, before submitting a proposal, the Contractor shall have investigated the site and determined to his own satisfaction the site conditions and limitations insofar as they will affect his work. B. Underground Utilities: Failure of the drawings to show underground utility lines or other concealed piping, wiring and the like shall not be construed as a guarantee on the part of the Architect or the Owner that such conditions do not exist, though unknown. All operations involving excavations or removals shall be done at the risk of the Contractor who shall take the necessary precautions to protect employees and the public from injury or. death and to avoid damage to existing systems. C. Any and all materials to be excavated shall be considered as unclassified and as such the contractor shall assume responsibility for excavating to the depths and limits as required by the plans, specifications, adn contract documents. 1.9 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. All standards such as those issued by the American Society for Testing and Materials, American Standards Association, Federal, Military, or General Services Administration specifications which are referred to in this specification shall be considered as included herein by reference and unless a date or other designation is given which establishes the date of publication, it shall be that issue which is current at the time of the bidding. — 1.10. DEBRIS: A. All debris of any nature such asbroken,concrete, torn out masonry, plaster, excess fill, crates,. cartons,. etc. shall be the entire responsibility of the Contractor who shall remove the aforementioned debris from the site and legally dispose of same. 1.11. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION: A. Storage Sheds: Shall be confined, to the Construction Areas shown on the Drawings. O1010 - 4 SUMMARY OF WORK -- i i. CITIBUS 1192-1 All Storage space shall be of sufficient size to hold all �^ such materials, required on the site at one time and if the storage space is an outside building, it shall have floors raised at least 6" above the ground, on heavy joist or sleepers. B. Temporary Toilets: Shall be confined, to the Construction Areas shown on the drawings. 1. Post notices, take such precautions as may be necessary, and do any cleaning necessary to keep the building and premises in a sanitary condition. At the beginning of the work provide on the premises where approved, suitable temporary toilets and enclosures for the use of all workmen on the job, including separate contractors, and maintain same in sanitary condition and remove same and all its contents upon completion of the building. C. Temporary power and lights: Provide temporary power and lights as required for the project. D. Temporary water: Provide temporary water as required for the project. 1.12. CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL: A. The Contractor shall employ a competent Superintendent to be in attendance at the job site whenever any work is being performed. B. The Contractor shall maintain an, adequate inspection system and perform -such inspections as will assure that the work performed will conform to the Contract requirements. C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective quality control program which will assure that all supplies and services required shall conform to the Contract requirements whether constructed or processed by the Contractor, or procured from Sub -contractors at any tier, or from vendors and suppl.iers . 1.13. OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT: A. Bidders shall review the Williams-Stieger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and all subsequent revisions and amendments thereto and Rules and Regulations (hereinafter referred to as OSHA) implementing.the provisions of such Act prior to the submission of their proposals to perform the work to be accomplished under this contract. Bidders shall, in preparing their bid proposals, make adequate allowances for SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 5 t CITIBUS 1192-1 the strict compliance with OSHA and any subsequent Rules and Regulations having the force of law. 1.14. ACCESS TO WORK: A. The Owner or any one he may designate, the Architect and his representatives shall at .all times have access to the work wherever it is in preparation of progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper and safe facilities for such access and for inspection. 1.15. TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICE A. The General Contractor shall furnish and maintain throughout the construction phase a temporary field office. B. The General Contractor shall provide a telephone which will be available to all persons connected with the work; however, the Contractor shall not be liable for long distance calls except those authorized by himself. C. The General Contractor shall provide suitable toilet facilities for all workmen and shall remove same at completion of work. Provide a suitable blind at all temporary toilets. 1.16." DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to describe and provide for a finished and complete piece of Work. And as such, though the Drawings and Specifications may be diagramic and may not show, indicate or specify all necessary off -sets, appendage(s) and/or apparatus(s), it is the intent thereof for the General Contractor to provide all necessary items for a finished and complete operational piece(s) of work. All Work must meet the requirements of all the applicable and governing laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of the locality. B. No extra compensation will be allowed for oversight of any such requirements, except by written order issued by the Owner. C. Should any doubt arise regarding Drawings or Specifications, clarification shall be requested of the Architect. Failure to do so will not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to complete the work to the Owner's satisfaction. 01010 - 6 SUMMARY OF WORK r CITIBUS 1192-1 t D. The arrangement of the specifications is intended as a convenience to the Contractor and others connected with the work. No responsibility direct or implied is assumed by the contractor or his subcontractors due to real or alleged error in the arrangement of the specifications. E. In case of conflict between the drawings and specifications or between large and small scale drawings or between specifications and schedules the Architect will determine the requirements to use; but, in general, the material, equipment, or method producing the best quality construction in the opinion of the Architect will be used. F. The mention of certain items in the specifications or drawings to the exclusion of others; or the mention of work to be done in a specific area to the exclusion of similar work required 4 in other areas; or the failure to cross-reference related work specified elsewhere, shall not relieve the Contractor of his r" responsibility under the Contract Documents. G. The segregation of the various parts of the work under headings, by trades, does not relieve the Contractor of the responsiblility for furnishing every item shown on the Drawings or mentioned in the specifications or reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended results in a first class manner. 1.17. CODES AND ORDINANCES A. Materials and construction shall conform with applicable requirements of the latest edition of the following documents: 1. Uniform Building Code, latest edition. 2. The National Electric Code, latest edition 3. Uniform Plumbing Code and Uniform Mechanical Code, latest editions. 4. The Rules and Regulations of the Board of Underwriters Laboratories. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act. 6. All State, National Codes, Ordinances, Rules and Regulations, not specifically mentioned above but which apply to the proposed construction. 7. In any case of conflict between any of the documents mentioned above, the highest requirements shall govern. No extras shall be allowed for any changes to make the work conform with the regulations of the above mentioned documents; they shall be considered FSUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 7 CITIBUS 1192-1 as completely included in the Contract Price. Nothing in these plans and Specificationsis_ to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. B. All applicable State laws, municipal ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities. having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the contract throughout, and they will be — deemed to be included in the Contract the same as though herein written out in full. 1.18. EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES A. Existing underground lines occur in the site where the work is to be done. The Contractor shall visit the site and determine the location of all utility lines. Existing lines shown in the Drawings are not guaranteed as to size and location or for completeness. Any utility line which interferes with the new construction and is not to be relocated, removed or rerouted by others and/or is to remain on the site as shown in the Drawings, shall be relocated or rerouted by the Contractor as directed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner. 1.19 LAYOUT OF THE WORK A. The Contrator shall be soley responsible for the layout of the work in strict compliance with the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable). END OF SECTION 01010 01010 - 8 SUMMARY OF WORK r CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 01023 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS AS INDICATEDINTHE GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT - ITEM 52 SPECIAL CONDITIONS, THE FOLLOWING SPECIAL CONDITIONS SHALL CONTROL OVER THE AFOREMENTIONED GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT. General Condition - Item #1 Add the following paragraphs after the first paragraph: "The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the P, site of the Project, and a legal description of the site." "Information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work." r "Unless otherwise- provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of Work." General Conditions - Item #2 l In line 4 the successful Contractor shall be named. l Add the following paragraphs after the first paragraph: "The Contractor - shall supervise and direct Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, 17 methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for the layout and coordination of all portions of the Work under the Contract." r' "The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor." T General Conditions - Item #3 Add the word "Architects..." before the word "Engineers,..." in line eight. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01023 - 1 F CITIBUS-1192-1 Add the following sentence to the end of the paragraph: "Any and all communications between the Owner, the Owner's Representative and the Contractor involving change order(s), construction change directive(s) and/or orders for a minor change(s) in the Work shall go through the Architect." General Conditions - Item #4 Add the words "...Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract...-" after the word "...Plans..." in line five. General Conditions - Item #5 In lines five and eight of the first paragraph and line seven of second paragraph add: "and the Architect" after "Representative". Delete the word "..his..." in line six of the second paragraph and add the word "...their..." in place of the deleted word. Add the following paragraphs after the second paragraph: "In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an", but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement." "In case of conflict between drawings, specifications, large and small scale details, schedules or other parts of the Contract Documents, the Owner's Representative and/or Architect will determine the requirements to use; but in general, the material, equipment or method producing the best quality of construction in the opinion of the Architect will be used. General Conditions Item #6 Add the following paragraphs after the first paragraph: "A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor." "A Sub -subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub -subcontractor" is referred to 01023 - 2 SPECIAL CONDITIONS I r 7 F F CITIBUS 1192-1 throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub -subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub -subcontractor." "The preeceeding two (2) paragraphs shall not limit claimants who have furnished labor and/or material in the procecution of the work from filing claims for payment." "Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection." "By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with the respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub - subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their proposed Sub -subcontractors." General Conditions - Item #11 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01023 - 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 In line one delete the words "one copies" and substitute "a reasonable number of copies". General Conditions - Item #13 Delete the entire paragraph. General Conditions - Item #15 In lines three and nine, after the word "subordinate" add the word "Architect". General Conditions - Item #16 In line one the third paragraph, after the words " The Owner or Owner's Representative" add the words "...and the Architect or his Consultants..." Add the following after the third paragraph: "The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have -control over the construction means,- methods, techniques, sequences, procedures and for — coordinating all portions of the -Work." General Conditions - Item #27 In the first'paragraph, line sixteen, after the word "employees" add the words "including the Architect and his Consultants"... General Conditions - Item #28 Also name "Architect" in articles A, B, C, and E as additional insured. _. General Conditions Item #30 In line two of paragraph one, after the word "Owner" add the words "and Architect and his Consultants..." General Conditions - Item #31 In -lines four and seven, after the word "Owner" add the words "and Architect and his Consultants" 01023 - 4 SPECIAL CONDITIONS i 4 , CITIBUS 1192-1 General Conditions - Item #32 In I ine four of paragraph one, after the word "Owner" add the words "and Architect and his Consultants". General Conditions - Item #33 In the second paragraph, line six, delete the number "$0.00 ( )" and substitute the words and numbers "One --hundred dollars ($100.00)". General Conditions Item #37 Delete Item #37 General Conditions - Item #39 In line nine, after the word "Owner" add the words ".., the Architect and his Consultants". _ General Conditions - Item #42 rIn line one of the first paragraph, delete the word "tenth" and add "25th". L In lines two and three of the first paragraph, after "Owner's l Representative" add the words "and the Architect". In line nine of the first paragraph after "materials delivered" add "and suitably stored...". * Add the following paragraphs which, as such, shall constitute Item #57. Item #57 - Basic Definition "The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project." "The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors." SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01023 - 5 B ' CITIBUS 1192-1 "The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections,- details, schedules and diagrams." "The Specifications are the portion of the. Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services." "The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications." * Add the following paragraphs which, as such, shall constitute Item #58: Item #58 - Execution, Correlation and Intent "The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required to be consistent with the Contract Documents and what is required from them as being necessary to produce"the intended results. "Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings. shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade." "Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract,Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings such as found in the Illustrated Encyclopedic Dictionary of Building and Construction Terms by Hugh Brooks." Add the following paragraph which, as such, shall constitute Item #59 Item #59 - Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings, Specifications and Other Documents "The Drawings Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The 01023 - 6 SPECIAL CONDITIONS F CITIBUS 1192-1 Contractor may -retain one contract record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, sub -subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project.- They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and Architect. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors,and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect. I Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's copyrights or other reserved rights." Add the following paragraphs which, as such, shall constitute Item #60. Item #60 - Architect "The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing. architecture f identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as. if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative." Add the following paragraphs which, as such, shall constitute Item #61. r SPECIAL CONDITIONS L 01023 - 7 `CITIBUS 1192-1 Item #61 - Architects Administration of the Contract "In accordance with the Owner's Contract with the Architect, the Architect's Administration of the Contract shall consist of the following activities:" "The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract." "The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's responsibility. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of, and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractor, or their agents or employees, or of any other persons performing portions of the Work.." "Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or -when -- direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate through, the Architect. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. "The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, �. Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such -- submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under the Contract. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, 01023 - 8 SPECIAL CONDITIONS r CITIBUS 1192-1 techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component." "The Architect will assist the Owner's Representative in the r preparation Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work not affecting a change in cost or time." "The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such request will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 working days after written request is made for them." "Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith." "The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents." END OF SECTION 01023 7 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01023 - 9 7 r CITIBUS 1192-1 1 t, SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates. B. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation- methods described in Contract Documents. C. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. D. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each Alternate. Indicate whether Alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to Alternates. E. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate. 1. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). ALTERNATES 01030 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1. SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES Ai Alternate No. 1: Provide an alternate price to delete all work _ - associated with the steel frame canopies. Alternate No. 2: Provide an alternate price to add site �j paving as shown on the Drawings. C. Alternate No. 3: Provide an alternate price to change Light Fixture "K" to Light Fixture "L". D. Alternate No. 4: Provide an alternate price to change the VCT floor finish in Alcove (101), (111), (121) and (122) and the Lobby (113) to a Quarry Tile floor finish. E. Alternate No. 5: Provide an alternate price to.add four (4) Red I Oaks, two (2) Honeylocust and two (2) Cedar Elms as — scheduled. F. Alternate No. 6: Provide an alternate price to add millwork inDispatcher(103), Office (104),Office (110), Vault (105) and Storage (109). G. Alternate No. 7: Provide an alternate price to add eleven (11) trash receptacles where shown on the;,Drawings. H. Alternate No. 8: Provide an alternate price to add five (5) — #(2 benches where shown on the Drawings., I. Alternate No. 9: If Alternate No. 5 is accepted, provide an alternate price to increase the size of six (6) Cedar Elms to 6 inch B & B, twelve (12) Red Oaks to 7 inch B & B and twelve (12) Shademaster Honeylocust to 6 inch B & B. rJ) Alternate No. 10: If Alternate No.l is not accepted, provide _.1 an alternate price to change the standing seam metal roofing and "C" & "Z" purlins to,a modified bituminous roof membrane with one inch thick insulation board on 1-1/2 inch metal deck and 8 inch x 4 inch steel tube purlins with all exposed metal surfaces painted.as specified. K. Alternate No. 11:-Provide an alternate price to change Light Fixture "M".to Light Fixture "L". L. Alternate No. 12: Provide an alternate price to add two (2) curb ramps as shown by Detail 2/SP-1. Scope includes the removal of existing curb, paving and base as required for the installation of the new curb ramps. Location of the new curb ramps shall be as directed by the Architect in the field after the Award of Contract. END OF SECTION 01030 01030 - 2 ALTERNATES �, CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1. Requirements of this Section apply to all portions of the work including mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Division-15 and Division-16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. C. In general all cutting and patching shall be performed in such a manner as to provide a finish appearance similar to the wall, floor and ceiling conditions that existed in the space being altered. Finishes shall be as near the existing adjacent finishes as possible. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Where approval of procedures for cutting and patching is required before proceeding, submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal: 1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and how it is to be performed; indicate why it cannot be avoided. 2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction; include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance and other significant visual elements. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 1.4. 3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work. 4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching is to be performed. 5. List utilities that will be disturbed or affected, including those that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out -of -service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. b. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the Architect's right to later require complete removal and replacement of a part of the Work found to be unsatisfactory. QUALITY ASSURANCE Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load - carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. 1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following structural elements: a. Foundation construction. b. Bearing and retaining walls. c. Structural concrete. d. Structural steel. e. Lintels. f St t 1 d ki ruc ura ec ng. g. Miscellaneous structural metals. h. Equipment supports. i. Piping, ductwork, vessels and equipment. B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related components in a manner — that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Obtain approvalof the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Shoring, bracing, and sheeting. b. Primary operational systems and equipment. c. Air or smoke barriers d. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. e. Membranes and flashings. f. Fire protection systems. g. Noise and vibration control elements and systems. 01045 - 2 CUTTING AND PATCHING r- r-� C. CITIBUS 1192-1 h. Control systems. i. Communication systems. j. Conveying systems. k. Electrical wiring systems. 1. Special construction specified by Division-13 Sections. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces or like construction elsewhere to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSPECTION A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 1. Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 3.2. PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Take all precautions necessary to avoid -cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3. PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled craftsmen to perform cutting and patching. Patching shall be done by craftsmen certified in the particular craft involved. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to -provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching r required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to be retained or adjoining construction. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with the original installer's recommendations. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or, performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity'of the installation. "^ 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 01045 - 4 CUTTING AND PATCHING I CITIBUS 1192-1 i 3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished ?*7 area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance., Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch, after the patched area has received primer and second coat. 4. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.4. CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. END OF SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045 - 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 01300 —SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL I.I. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative! and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including; 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submittal schedule. 3. Shop Drawings. 4. Product Data. 5. Samples. B. Inspection and test reports are included in Section "Quality Control Services." 1.3. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay: 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. SUBMITTALS a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 01300 - 1 CITIBUS i192-1 3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. i 4. For material or equipment requiring color selections note that ALL such materials and equipment must be submitted before ANY color selections can be made. B. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each,submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. 1. On the transmittal Record relevant information and requests for data. " On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. 1.4. CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar- chart type Contractor's construction schedule. Submit •within 30 days of the date established for "Commencement of the Work". ti 1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity.. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values". 2. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. B. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence of the Work is affected by requirements for phased completion to permit Work by separate Contractors and partial occupancy by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion. C. Distribution: -Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies. to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required.to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and �~ temporary field office. 01300 - 2 SUBMITTALS 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. D. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule monthly to relect actual work in place to the date of the updatei. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. 1.5. SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate -deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings. C. Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that show the relationship and —integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended. 1. Submit coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. 1.6. PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing -in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings." r SUBMITTALS : 01300 - 3 K CITIBUS 1192-1 2. Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal; submit 4 copies where required for maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one, and will return the other marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. 1.7. SAMPLES A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials,' color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern. 1. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation and similar construction characteristics. 2. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. 1.8. ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified Contractor's responsibility. characteristics is the 01300 - 4 SUBMITTALS wy r"- CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). END OF SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL ! 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General j' and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services. B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports, performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of, responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products. 1. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation procedures. 2. Inspections, test and related actions specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality control procedures that -facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400 - 1 r CITIBUS 1192-1 1.3. RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similar quality control services, specified in individual Specification Sections and required by governing authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be the Owner's responsibility, or are provided by another identified entity; these services include those specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by the Contractor. Costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Sum. r-- 1. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractor's responsibility. a. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction. 2. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests and �— similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to: a. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental r Tabor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. b.Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. c. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing laboratories. d. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. e. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site. 01400 - 2 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Owner Responsibilities: The Owner will provide inspections, tests and similar quality control services specified to be performed by independent agencies and not by the Contractor. 1. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent agency, testing laboratory or other qualified firm to perform the following work: a. Excavation and soils testing. b. On site concrete testing. C. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. I. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities. 2. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and Testing Agency at least 48 hours before an on -site test is required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample - taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired construction. C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services. END OF SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400 - 3 i CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 01631 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL I.I. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made before submittal of bidder. 1.3. DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modify the meaning of •other terms used in the Contract Documents. B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Bidder before submittal of bids are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions: 1. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 3. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received in writing not less than fifteen (15) full days prior to the date of the scheduled opening. Requests received less than 15 days shall be returned unopened to the Bidder. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and in accordance with procedures as outlined in the FTA Guidelines and Regulations. 2. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. I Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures. b. Samples, where applicable or requested. c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with -those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect. d. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the.Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, between the substitution and the specified product. g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal -to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time, that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. 3. The Architect will notify the Bidder of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution at least ten (10) full days before the scheduled date for opening of the proposals. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product _ specified by name. 01631 - 2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. SUBSTITUTIONS A. Conditions: The Bidder's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted. 4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved. 7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations. 8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. 9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631 - 3 { CITIBUS 1192-1 G B. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Drawings, Product Data or Samples that relate to construction 7. activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01631 f. 01631 - 4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS I CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings. B. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks and pavements is included aspartof this work. C. Backfilling of trenches within building lines is included as part of this work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service 1. Owner will engage a soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations. The testing laboratory shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil or Rock Used In Engineering Design and Construction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Submit following reports directly to Architect from the testing services, with copies to Contractor and Engineer. 1.- Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of soil encountered. a. Atterberg Limits b. Linear Shrinkage c. Optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve 2. Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills. Reports shall indicate soil type or change of soil if any other is used. EARTHWORK 02200 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Site Information 1. A subsurface soils investigation at the site has been made. Logs of borings and test data are available for Contractor's information and for his interpretation as to soil and water conditions that may be encountered at the site. 2. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. Data are made available for the convenience of the Contractor. ~ 3. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at ,no cost to Owner. B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, �. consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when -- permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. C. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted. D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. ._ 1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction."- 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 02200 2 EARTHWORK 1 I I CITIBUS 1192-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, SM, SW and SP. B. unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and PT. C. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed sand. The liquid limit of the base material shall not be greater than 35 and the plasticity index shall not be greater than 12 and the linear shrinkage shall not exceed 8. The gradation of the base material shall be as follows: Passing 2" sieve Retained on #40 sieve Retained on #100 sieve 100 percent 50 - 85 percent 85 - 100 percent D. Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of clay lumps, stones and debris. E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock .or gravel larger than 211 in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. Fill materials shall have a liquid limit between 4 and 30 and the plasticity index shall be between 4 and 12. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing required finish grade elevations. B. Earth excavation includes . removal and disposal of pavements and other obstructions visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock excavation or unauthorized excavation. C. unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense. I EARTHWORK '02200 - 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 D. Under footings, fill unauthorized excavation by extending / indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to Architect. E. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. F. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect who will make an inspection of conditions. ` 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at — required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper r` and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. G. Stability of Excavations 1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not, possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. H. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. r Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. I. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpilesi, for proper drainage. 02200 4 EARTHWORK r. CITIBUS 1192-1 1. Locate and retain soils materials away from edge of excavations. 2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. J. Excavation for Structures 1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus O.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection. 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. K. Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross -sections, elevations and grades as shown. L. Excavation for Trenches 1. Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups. 3. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. 4. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of Pipe• 5. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footings. 6. Concrete is -specified in Division 3. 7. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. M. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F. (1 degree C.) (� EARTHWORK 02200 - 5 i CITIBUS 1192-1 r 3.2 COMPACTION A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification. B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry -- density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor); and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship. 1. Structures: Compact top 8" (minimum) of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 2. Building Slabs: Compact top 8" (minimum) of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 3. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum dry density. 4. Walkways: Compact top 8" (minimum) of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill materials at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density. 5. Pavements: Compact top 8" (minimum) of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry density, for cohesive _ soil material. 6. Pavement Base Course: Compact 6" layer of base material to at least 95% of maximum dry sensity. Base course to be located over compacted subgrade. C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. =- 2. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. -Assist drying by dicing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 02200 - 6 EARTHWORK :- rr", CITIBUS 1192-1 3.3 BACKFILL AND FILL A. General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below. 1. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 2. Under grassed areas and walks, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 3. Under building slabs, use satisfactory borrow material. 4. Under concrete pavements, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material under a 6" layer of subbase material. B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.. 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of trash and debris. C. Ground Surface Preparation 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 2. when existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum .density. D. Placement and Compaction 1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by -hand -operated tampers. 2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. �- 3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to r structures, to required elevations. Take care to j EARTHWORK 02200 7 CITIBUS 1192-1 prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. 3.4 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where -- elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to .-- building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. C. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. �-- 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/21, above or below required subgrade elevation. D. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. E. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification. 3.5 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE A. General: Subbase course consists of placing subbase materials,6" thick, over subgrade surface to support a ,concrete pavement. B. See other Division 2 sections for paving specifications. r Co Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross -slope of subbase course. D. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum 02200 8 EARTHWORK r ti CITIBUS11192-1 moisture content for compacting subbase material during placement operations. E. When a compacted subbase course is shown to be 6" thick or less, place material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 61, thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6" or less than 31, in thickness when compacted. r- 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control Testing During Construction 1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. 2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (Sand Cone Method) or ASTM D 2167 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D 2922, (Nuclear Gauge Method) as applicable. B. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade 1. Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests. Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested and approved by the testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer. C. If, in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense. 3.7 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, re -shape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. r- EARTHWORK 02200 - 9 t CITIBUS 1192-1 3.8 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Removal from Owner's Property 1. Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02200 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. 02200 - 10 EARTHWORK - CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 02282 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. Provide soil treatment for termite control, as herein specified. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work, including preparation of substrate and application. B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution. C. Use only termiticides which bear a Federal registration number of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1.5. JOB CONDITIONS A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations- are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations. B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer. TERMITE CONTROL 02282 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 1.6. SPECIFIC PRODUCT WARRANTY A. Furnish written warranty certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites and, that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Provide warranty for a period of 5 years from date of treatment, signed by Applicator and Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with -- water, specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a solution consisting of one of following chemical elements and concentrations: 1. Chloropyrifos ("Dursban TC"); 1.0 percent in water emulsion. 2. Permathrin ("Dragnet", "Torpedo"); 0.5 percent in water emulsion. B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if also acceptable to Architect and approved for intended application by jurisdictional authorities. Use only soil treatment solutions which are not injurious to planting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. APPLICATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously ~" compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placement of compacted fill under slabs, if recommended by toxicant manufacturer. B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows: C. Under slab -on -grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed, using the following rates of application: 02282 - 2 TERMITE CONTROL CITIBUS 1192-1 1. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. to soil in critical areas under slab, including entire inside perimeter inside of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers. 2. Applyonegallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. as an overall treatment under slab and attached slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of chemical solution to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material. 3. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of trench, for each foot of depth from grade to footing, along outside edge of building. Dig a trench 6" to 8" wide along outside of foundation to a depth of not less than 12". Punch holes to top of footing at not more than 12" o.c. and apply chemical solution. Mix chemical solution with the soil as it is being replaced in trench. D. Treat soil under or around crawl -space structures as follows: 1. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin, ft. of trench along inside of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partitions, and around piers and plumbing. Do not apply an overall treatment in crawl spaces. 2. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of trench, for each foot of depth from grade to footing, along outside of foundation walls, including part beneath entrance platform porches, etc. 3. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. along the inside and outside of foundation walls of porches. 4. Apply one gallon per 10 sq. ft. of soil surface as an overall treatment, only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. E. At hollow masonry foundations or grade beams, treat voids at rate of 2 gal. per 10 lin. ft., poured directly into the hollow spaces. F. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs 1 will be penetrated, apply at rate of 4 gals. per 10 lin. ft. of penetration. r` G. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil t termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. �- H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02282 TERMITE CONTROL r 02282 - 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 l SECTION 02514 - CONCRETE WALKS AND PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: #. A. The extent of concrete walks and paving is shown on the Drawings. B. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work, for materials, testing, mixing, placing and t curing, except as herein specified otherwise. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Grade Control: and grades. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Forms: Establish and maintain the required lines 1. Either steel or wood, of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use forms that are straight and free of distortion and defects. Bent, twisted, split or defective form materials are not permitted. 2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. 3. Coat forms with a non -staining, clear, paraffin base form oil that will not discolor or otherwise deface the surface of the concrete. B. Concrete: Comply with applicable requirement of Section 03300, Concrete Work, for concrete materials. Concrete mix shall not be the same as used for building slabs and foundations. Exterior concrete shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days and shall contain six (6) sacks (564 lbs.) of cement per cubic yard of concrete, 5 percent plus or minus 1 percent of entrained air, coarse aggregate 1" or smaller and shall be poured with a slump of 5" plus or minus 111. Mix shall contain fly ash. Cement content may be adjusted for fly ash in accordance with cited standards. r CONCRETE WALKS AND PAVING 02514 - 1 i CITIBUS 1192-1 C. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement: (See plans for concrete containing fibrous reinforcement.) 1. General: 100 percent virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers specially .manufactured for use as concrete reinforcement, containing no reprocessed olefin materials. Fibrous concrete reinforcement shall be as manufactured by Fibermesh Company, 4019 Industry Drive, Chattanooga, TN 37416, or approved equal. Use in all exterior concrete not otherwise detailed. 2. Physical Characteristics: a. Specific Gravity: 0.91 b. Tensile Strength: 70 to 110 ksi c. Fiber lengths: 1/211, 3/4", 1 1/2", 2" per manufacturer. D. Expansion Joints: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. . Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. Remove all loose material from the uniformly compacted subgrade surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION: A. Set forms to the required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install sufficient lengths of forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Tops of walks and paving shall slope at least 1 / 8 per foot. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances: 1. Top of form units: Not more than 1/8" in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face: Longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4" in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each often as required to without damage. 3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT: A. Generals use, .and coat with form oil as ensure separation from concrete 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work, for mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specif ied. 2. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete 02514 2 CONCRETE. WALKS AND PAVING CITIBUS 1192-1 materials at the tiib 66fibrete is batched in amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this type r-■ of concrete. Mix batched concrete in strict accordance t' with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. 3. Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subgrade as required to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they have been brought to the required grade and alignment. r..4 4. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of the mix, and with as little rehandling as possible. Consolidate concrete along the face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal '~ vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. Do not over vibrate. 5. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construc- tion joint. Sections less than 15 feet in length between transverse joints. will not be permitted. -j Remove such sections if directed by the Architect. 3.4 JOINTS: A. General: - Construct expansion, weakened -plane (contraction), and construction joints true -to -line with face perpendicular to surface of the concrete, unless otherwise shown. Construct transverse joints 'to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise shown. *� B.'Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened -plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on the Drawings. Construct weakened-plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 p concrete thickness as follows: 3 C. Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. D. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at the end of all pours and at locations where placement operations ej are stopped for a period of more than 1/2 hour, except where such pour terminates at expansion joints. 1. Construct joints as shown, or if not shown, use standard metal keyway section forms. 1 E. Expansion Joints: . Provide premolded joint filler for CONCRETE -WALKS AND PAVING 02514 - 3 l CITIBUS'1192-1 expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks and other fixed objects.' 1. Expansion joints shall be at 20 feet o.c., unless otherwise shown. 2. Extend joint fillers full -width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2" or more than l" below finished surface. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for the full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. Form top edge of filler to conform to top profile of concrete. 3. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after both sides of joint are placed. 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING: A. Finishes: Unless indicated otherwise, items of concrete to be finished as follows: 1. All sidewalks, concrete aprons and porches shall have float finish, brushed as directed to provide non -slip finish. 2. Curbs and driveway approaches shall be finished with a stiff -bristled broom to provide non -slip finish. Provide sample for approval. B. The following finishing procedures shall be observed: 1. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface by screeding and floating. Do not use "Jitterbugs". Use hand methods only.where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust the floating to compact the surface and produce a uniform mixture. 2. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous, smooth finish. 3. Work edges of slabs, back top edge of curb and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2" radius, unless otherwise shown. Eliminate any tool marks on concrete surface. 4. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared complete surface finishing as follows: a. Broom Finish: Broom finish, by drawing a fine broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to the Architect. b. On inclining slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with a 02514 - 4 CONCRETE WALKS AND PAVING W CITIBUS 1192-1 3.6 CURING: A. Protect and cure finished concrete walks, curbs and paving, complying with the applicable requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work. Use moist -curing methods whenever possible for first 24 hours then apply curing compound. 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS: A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with polysulphide-epoxy binder, or with polysulphide resin grout, complying with FS MMM-G-650B CANC. C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Sweep concrete pavement and walks free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. END OF SECTION 02514 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. CONCRETE WALKS AND PAVING 02514 - 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 02810 - UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of underground irrigation system is shown on Drawings. B. Refer to Division-16 sections for electrical service for automatic control system. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide underground irrigation system as a complete unit produced ;by acceptable manufacturers, including heads, valves, controls, and accessories. 1.4. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for underground sprinkler system. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for underground irrigation system including plan layout and details illustrating location and type of heads, valves, piping circuits, controls, and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following: 1. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. .or approved equal. UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 2.2. MATERIALS: A. Pressure Pipe: Comply with following: 1. 3" PVC plastic pipe, ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. B. Circuit Pipe (downstream from circuit valves): Comply with following: 1. PVC plastic pipe, ASTM D 2241, 200 psi. C. Pipe Fittings: Comply with following: 1. For PVC plastic pipe, ASTM D 2466 socket fittings with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. D. Valves: Manufacturer's standard, of type and size indicated, and as follows: 1. Automatic Circuit Valves: Globe valves operated by low - power solenoid, normally closed, manual flow adjustment. 2. Automatic Drain Valves: Designed to open for ,drainage when line pressure drops below 3 psi. E. Backflow Preventer: Manufacturer's standard, to suit sprinkler system shall be brass double-check valve(s) at irrigation stub source. F. Sprinkler Heads: Manufacturer's standard unit designed to .provide uniform coverage over entire area of spray shown on .,drawings at available water pressure, as follows: 1. Pop -Up Spray: Fixed pattern, with screw -type flow adjustment and stainless steel retraction spring. G. Valve Box: Ametek 10" with lock H. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3" maximum to 3/4" minimum. 2.3. AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM: RAINBIRD BRAND OR APPROVED EQUAL A. General: Furnish low voltage system manufactured expressly for control of automatic circuit valves of underground irrigation systems. Provideunitof capacity to suit number of circuits as indicated. B.'` Exterior Control Enclosure:Manufacturer's standard weatherproof enclosure with locking cover, complying with NFPA 70 (National Electric Code). UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - 2 CITIBUS 1192-1 C. Interior Control Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard with locking cover, complying with NFPA 70. D. Transformer: To convert building service voltage to control voltage of 24 volts. E. Circuit Control: Each circuit variable from approximately 5 to 60 minutes. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each circuit. F. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24-hour and 7 or 14 day clocks to operate any time of day and skip any day in a 7 or 14 day period. 1. Allow for manual or semi -automatic operation without disturbing preset automatic operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING: A. General: Excavate straight and true with bottom uniformly sloped to low points. B. Protect existing lawns and plantings. Remove and replant as necessary to complete installation. Replace damaged lawn areas and plants with new to match existing. C. Trench Depth: Excavate trenches to a depth of 3" below invert of pipe, unless otherwise indicated. D. Minimum Cover: Provide following minimum cover over top of installed piping: 1. PVC piping, 20". E. Backfill: Backfill with clean material from excavation. Remove organic material as well as rocks and debris larger than 1" diameter. Place acceptable backfill material in 6" lifts, compacting each lift. F. Pavements: Where existing pavements must be cut to install irrigation system, cut smoothly to straight lines 6" wider than trench. G. Excavate trench to required depth and width. H. Remove cut-out pavement and excavated material from the site. l UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 I. At walkways, jack piping under paving material, if possible. J. Backfill with dry sand fill material, placing in 6-inch lifts. K. Repair or replace pavement cuts with equivalent materials and finishes. 3.2. INSTALLATION: A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with requirements of Uniform Plumbing Code. B. Connection to Main: Connect to building piping in location indicated. 1. Connect to irrigation tee located in building piping. C. Maintain uninterrupted water service to building during normal 7_ working hours. Arrange for temporary water shut-off with Architect/Engineer. D. Backflow Preventer: FEBCO Double Check Assembly or approved equal. E. Circuit Valves: Install in valve box, arranged for easy adjustment and removal. 1. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. F. Piping: Lay pipe on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. 1. For circuit piping, slope to drain valve at least 1/2" in 10' of run. 2. At wall penetrations, pack the opening around pipe with non -shrink grout. At exterior face, leave a perimeter slot approximately 1/2" wide by 3/4" deep. Fill this slot with backer rod and an acceptable elastomeric sealant. Repair below grade waterproofing disturbed by this work and make penetration watertight. 3. Install PVC pipe in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg.F (4 deg.C) in. strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperature above 40 deg.F (4 deg.C) before testing, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. G. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - 4 CITIBUS 1192-1 acceptable drain material to 12" below -grade. Cover drain material with a sheet of 30-lb. asphalt saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material. H. Sprinkler Heads: Flush circuit lines with full head of water and install heads after hydrostatic test is completed. 1. Install shrubbery heads at heights indicated. 2. Locate part -circle heads to maintain a minimum distance of 4" from walls and 2" from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated.. 3.3. TESTING: A. General: Notify Architect/Engineer in writing when testing will be conducted. Conduct tests in presence of Architect/Engineer. B. Hydrostatic Test: Test water piping and valves, before backfilling trenches, to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psi. Piping may be tested in sections to expedite work. Remove and repair piping, connections, valves which do not pass hydrostatic testing. C. Operational Testing: . Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is completed, backfill is in place, and sprinkler heads adjusted to final position. 1. Demonstrate to Architect/Engineer that system meets coverage requirements and that automatic controls function properly. 2. Coverage requirements are based on operation of one circuit at a time. D. After completion of grading, carefully adjust lawn sprinkler heads so they will be flush with or not more than 1/2" above finish grade. END OF SECTION 02810 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes provisions for the following items: 1. Trees. 2. Shrubs 3. Plants. 4. Ground cover. 5. Soil amendments. 6. Initial maintenance of landscape materials. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Excavation, filling, and rough grading required to establish elevations shown on drawings is specified in Division 2 Section, "Earthwork." 2. Underground sprinkler system is specified in Division 2 Section, "Underground Irrigation System." 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontract landscape work to a single firm specializing in landscape work. B. Source Quality Control: 1. General: Ship landscape materials -with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. 2. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit proof of non - availability to Architect, together with proposal for use of equivalent material. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 3. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in -- accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable. 4. Topsoil: Before delivery of topsoil, furnish Architect with written statement giving location of properties from which topsoil is to be obtained, names and addresses of owners, depth to be stripped, and crops grown during past 2 years _ 5. Trees, Shrubs and Plants: Provide trees, shrubs, and plants of quantity, size, genus, species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock". Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun -scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement. 6. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached -- waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. 7. Label all trees and all shrubs of each variety with a securely . attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. a. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and label with number to assure symmetry in planting. S. Inspection: The Architect may inspect trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Architect retains right to further inspect trees and shrubs for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Plant and Material Certifications: 1. Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 2 I _I CITIBUS 1192-1 2. Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. 3. Label data substantiating that plants, trees, shrubs and planting materials comply with specified requirements. C. Planting Schedule: Proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for each type of.landscape work during normal seasons for such work in area of site. Correlate with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of t substantial completion. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing, after documentation of reasons for delays. D. Maintenance Instructions:_ Typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one full year. Submit prior to expiration of required maintenance period(s). 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site. B. Trees and -Shrubs: Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery unless otherwise approved by Architect. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such manner as to damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop balled and burlapped stock during delivery. C. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, burlap or other acceptable means of retaining moisture. D. Do not remove container -grown stock from containers until planting time. 1.6. JOB CONDITIONS r- A. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a: manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 3 . CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Architect before planting. 1.7. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Planting Time: Proceed with, and complete landscape work as rapidly as portions of site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required. 1. Plant or install materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required. 2. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion. 1.8. SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY A. Warranty trees and shrubs through specified maintenance period, and until final acceptance. Warranty trees and shrubs, for a period of one year after date of substantial completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner, abuse or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents which are beyond Landscape Installer's control. Ground cover warranty shall be for a period of 90 days after substantial completion. C. Remove and replace trees, shrubs, or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthy condition during warranty period. Make replacements during growth season following end of warranty period. Replace trees and shrubs which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period; unless, in opinion of Architect, it is advisable to extend warranty period for a full growing season. 1. Another warranty inspection will be conducted at end of extended warranty period, if any, to determine acceptance or rejection. Only one replacement (per tree, shrub or plant) will be required at end of warranty period, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with specified requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. TOPSOIL A. Topsoil for landscape work is not available at site and must be furnished as specified. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 4 r r CITIBUS 1192-1 F. B. Provide new topsoil that is fertile, friable, natural loam, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. 1. Obtain topsoil from localsourcesor from areas having similar soil characteristics to that found at project site. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well -drained sites where topsoil occurs in a depth of not less than 4 inches Do not obtain from.bogs or marshes. 2.2. SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Mulch: Organic mulch free from deleterious materials and suitable for top dressing of trees, shrubs, or plants and consisting of one of the following: 1. Nature Life —composted cotton hull mulch 2. Back to Earth mulch B. Commercial Fertilizer: Complete fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived from organic sources and containing following percentages of available plant nutrients: 1. For trees and shrubs, provide fertilizer with not less than 5 percent total nitrogen, 10 percent available phosphoric acid and 5 percent soluble potash. 2.3. PLANT MATERIALS A. Quality: Provide trees, shrubs, and other plants of size, genus, species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock". B. Deciduous Trees: Provide trees of height and caliper scheduled or shown and with branching configuration recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type. and species required. Provide single stem trees except where special forms are shown or listed. 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) deciduous trees. C. Shrubs: Provide shrubs of the height shown or listed and with not less than minimum number of canes required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and height of shrub required. LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 5 CITIBUS-1192-1 1. All shrubs shall be container grown subject to specified limitations for container grown stock. D. Broadleafed Evergreens: Provide evergreens of sizes shown or listed. Dimensions indicate minimum spread for evergreens and height for other types, such as, cone, pyramidal, and broad r upright. Provide normal quality evergreens with well balanced form complying with requirements for other size relationships to the primary dimension shown. 1. Provide balled and burlapped (B&B) evergreens. 2. Container grown evergreens will be acceptable, subject to specified limitations for container grown stock. 2.4. GROUND COVER A. Provide plants established and well rooted in removable containers or integral peat pots -and with not less than minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 -� for the pot size shown or listed.: 2.5. MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS A. Steel Edging: Commercial- steel edging of size shown on drawings fabricated in sections with loops,,pressed from or welded to face of sections at 21- 6" o.c. to receive stakes. Provide tapered steel stakes 16 inches long. Finish edging sections and stakes with manufacturer's standard green -black paint. Steel edging to be furnished from the following manufacturers: 1. Ryerson Steel Corp. or approved equal. B. Wrapping: Tree -wrap tape not less than 4 inches wide, designed to prevent borer damage and winter freezing. C. Stakes and Guys: Provide metal T post and stakes - 3 per tree. Provide wire ties of 2-strand, twisted, pliable galvanized _ iron wire, not lighter than 12 ga. Provide not less than 1/2 inch diameter rubber or plastic hose, cut to required lengths and of uniform color, material, and size to protect tree trunks from damage by wires. See detail on plans. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. PREPARATION - GENERAL A. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 6 CITIBUS 1192-1 e multiple plantings. Verify any and all utility line locations. Locate tree and shrub locations so as not to conflict with any utility line. Stake locations and outline areas and secure Architect's acceptance before start of planting work. Make ,,. minor adjustments as may be required. i 3.2. PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL A. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. B. Mix specified soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at r rates specified. Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of planting soil within a few days. 1. "Schedule of Planting Soil Mixture Requirements" is attached at end of this section. C. For planting beds, mix planting soil either prior to planting ,. or apply on surface of topsoil and mix thoroughly before planting. 1. Mix 3 parts topsoil with 1 part mulch. 2. Apply 5-10-5 fertilizer to topsoil and till prior to planting. 3.3. PREPARATION OF PLANTING BEDS A. Loosen subgrade of planting bed areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches using a cults-mulcher or similar equipment. Remove stones measuring over 1-1/2 inches in any dimension. Remove sticks, stones, rubbish, and other extraneous matter. B. Spread planting soil mixture to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades, and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. Place approximately 1/2 of total amount of planting soil required. Work into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer, then place remainder of the planting soil. C. Dig beds not less than 8 inches deep and mix with specified soil amendments and fertilizers. 3.4. EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Excavate pits, beds, and trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to provide 7 LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 7 t"' CITIBUS 1192-1 proper drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation. 1. For balled and burlapped (B&B trees and shrubs), make -- excavations at least half again as wide as the ball diameter and equal to the ball depth, plus following allowance for setting of ball on a layer of compacted backfill: a. Allow for 3 inch thick setting layer of planting soil mixture. 2. For container grown stock, excavate as specified for balled and burlapped stock, adjusted to size of container _ width and depth. B. Dispose of subsoil removed from planting excavations. Do not mix with planting soil or use as backfill. 3.5. PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS A. Set balled and burlapped (B&B) stock on layer of compacted planting soil mixture, plumb and in center of pit or trench _ with top of ball at same elevation as adjacent finished landscape grades. Remove burlap from top of balls; retain on. bottoms. When set, place additional backfill around base and sides of ball, and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets When excavation is approximately 2/3 full, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing final layer of backfill. B. Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching C. Mulch all planted areas with approved cypress mulch with the thickness of mulch as top dressing. 1. Provide 2 inches thickness of mulch. D. Prune, thin out, and shape trees and shrubs in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by Architect, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees, if any. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. E. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock — resulting from improper pruning. F. Wrap tree trunks of 2 inches caliper and larger. Start at ground and cover trunk to height of first branches and securely attach. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 6 i CITIBUS 1192-1 r pruning and insect infestation and take corrective measures before wrapping. G. Stake trees immediately after planting, as indicated. 3.6. PLANTING GROUND COVER A. Space ground cover plants as indicated or scheduled. B. Dig holes large enough to allow for spreading of roots and backfill with planting soil. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover crowns of plants with wet soils. C. Mulch areas between ground cover plants; place not less than 2 inches thick with approved cypress mulch. 3.7. MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE WORK A. Install steel_ edging where indicated. Anchor with steel stakes spaced not more than 3 feet o.c., and driven at least even with top elevation of edging. 3.8. MAINTENANCE CA. Begin maintenance immediately after planting. B. Maintain trees, shrubs, and other plants until final l l acceptance, but in no case, less than following period: 1. 60 days after substantial completion of planting. C. Maintain trees, shrubs, and other plants by pruning, cultivating, and weeding as required for healthy growth. Restore planting and reset trees saucers. Tighten and repair stake supports and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. 3.9. CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to r LANDSCAPE WORK . 02900 - 9 CITIBUS 1192-1 landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed. 3.10. INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. When landscape work is completed, including maintenance, Architect will, upon request, make an inspection to determine acceptability. 1. Landscape work will not be inspected for acceptance in portions. B. When inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by Architect and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from project site. END OF SECTION 02900 _ r- LANDSCAPE WORK 02900 - 10 CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 03300 — CONCRETE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work.of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Concrete Walks and Paving - Section 02514 B. Poured Gypsum Roof Deck - Section 03510 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: r A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: t- 1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 30 ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". 4. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". 5. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 6. MSP-1-90 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice". 7. Environmental Protection Agency - Guideline for Federal Procurement of Cement and Concrete Containing Fly Ash. rB. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Architect. C. Design and Testing: 1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the Architect. A proven, established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may t^ be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 1 t CITIBUS 1192-1 2. Job site cylinders shall be taken when the Architect so directs. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and handling including breaking of same at laboratory. 3. The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory designated by the Architect and the Owner. 4. All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be borne by the Owner. 5. Test results shall be furnished to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor. 6. Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never meet strength requirements, the understrength concrete will be replaced with new as directed by Architect. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, chemical floor hardeners, dry -shake finish materials, and others as requested by the Architect. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement•of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS: A. Forms for Exposed Finish --Concrete : Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metalframed plywood -faced or -- other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints _ and to -conform to joint system shown on the .Drawings. Provideform material . with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or "good -as -new". B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior Grade or 03300 - 2 CONCRETE WORK 0 F F CITIBUS'' 1192-1 better, mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. D. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square spot footings are shown on the Drawings. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS: A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, except No. 3 ties and stirrups may be Grade 40. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, ewelded steel wire fabric. C. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 675, Grade 80 or ASTM A 499. D. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. 2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. 3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, -where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot/dip galvanized, or plastic protected or stainless steel protected. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS: A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C 150, Type I, (Federal Specification SS-C-1960/GEN.) unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Fine Aggregate: 1. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. �" CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 2. Dune sand, bank-run.sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed ,aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted. 3. "Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides,of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles or bars. b. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete -can be placed without honeycomb or voids D. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F; Fed. Spec. SS-C-1960/5A; ASTM C 311. E. Water:Clean, fresh, drinkable. F.' Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. H. Set -Control Admixtures:,.ASTM C 494, as follows: 1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating. I. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by Architect. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS: A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. -,Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab. B. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections. C. Moisture Barrier: 1. Provide moisture barrier cover over prepared base material where shown on Drawings. Use only materials 03300 - 4 CONCRETE WORK 71, F CITIBUS 1192-1 which are resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: r a.Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick. D. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with ei AASHTO M 182, Class 2. E. Moisture -Retaining Cover: one of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. F. Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to the Architect. G. Concrete Sealer: Acrylic co -polymer sealer equal to SealTite Tiah'as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. The sealer shall not after -yellow or change the natural color of the concrete and shall provide a highly weatherproof, PM stain -resistant and dustproof sealer. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES: A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Fly Ash is to be used in all hardrock concrete. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. - B. Prepare designmixesby either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. 1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 192 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C 39, specified in ACI 301. Establish a curve showing relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and compressive strength, with at least 3 1 points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when acceptable to the Architect, to establish each point on the curve. 2. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301. Strength data for r'^ CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 5 1 CITIBUS.1192-1 establishing standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions. 3. If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are available, select proportions to produce an average strength of.at least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of concrete. 4. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACI 214 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average.of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100. C. Submit written reports to the Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes havebeen reviewed by the Architect. D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: (Water: Cement ratios may be adjusted due to fly ash content in accordance with cited standards.) 1. 3000 psi 28 day compressive strength, W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air - entrained) 2. See Section 02514 for additional requirements for concrete mix design for sitework concrete. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions,: weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work. 2.6 ADMIXTURES: A. B. C. Use water -reducing admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits; 03300 - 6 CONCRETE WORK I CITIBUS:1192-1 1. 5.5% with I 1 / 2 i 3daxut " aggregate 2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate 3. 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate 4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate D. Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. E. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 2.7 SLUMP LIMITS: A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3". 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 311. 3. All Other Concrete: Not more than 411. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING: A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. B. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted. C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required. D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. r, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS: A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. r"' CONCRETE ' WORK 03300 - 7 CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before — concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, — removable or snapoff metal form ties, designated to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. _ H. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1 1/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. I. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from — trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. J. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if _ required to eliminate mortar leaks. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCING: A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and — methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as 0'3300 '8 CONCRETE WORK CITIBUS` 1192-1 herein specified.'` ' B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. F. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.3 JOINTS: ` A. Construction Joints: 1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the Drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the Architect. 2. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all ` construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls ,. and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. 3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction joints. B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. Form edge of pours with wood forms having keyway as detailed on the Drawings. Do not pour building floor slabs until the roof is --installed. r l C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between r slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls and elsewhere as indicated. �"' CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 9 CITIBUS,1192-1 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS: A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. — B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to -- obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of -strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES: A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in -� compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT: A. General: 1. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. -' 2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. 3. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to:be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their 03300 - 10 CONCRETE WORK i r CITIBUS 1192-1 work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in t horizontal layers not deeper than 181, and in a manner to t avoid inclined construction joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. �- At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. D. Placing Concrete Slabs: 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within 'the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. �.. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a r' straightedge and. strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during rconcrete placement operations. {' E. Cold Weather Placing: 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. 2. When airtemperaturehas fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly heat all water and r aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of placement. r^ 3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 11 4 CITIBUS 1192-1 on subgrade containing frozen materials. 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. F. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES: A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly -to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is the as -cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and smoothed. C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than the day after form removal. 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or' other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not ..apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing.process 03300' 12 CONCRETE WORK -- I CITIBUS-1192-1 D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown. 3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES: A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile or other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as shown on the Drawings. 1. After placing slabs, plane surface to,a tolerance not exceeding 1/2" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, withstiffbrushes, brooms or rakes. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic roofing, and as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low_ spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed -to -view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thinfilm finish coating system. 2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth r CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 13 CITIBUS'1192-1 surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Non -Slip Broom Finish: 1. Apply non -slip broom finish to ,exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before application. 3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION: A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete.from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has 'disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end -of final curing period. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water -fog spray. b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3~ and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair, any holes or tears, during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing compound.for-slabs as follows: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to 033W -14 CONCRETE WORK CITIBUS'1192-1 F b. c. concrete slabs` as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing period. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, _floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. 1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods specified above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. E. Applying Concrete Sealers Apply on all concrete slab floors scheduled to be left exposed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Concrete shall have cured for a least 7 days. 2. Concrete shall be clean and dry.prior to application, with oil stains, grease, etc. removed. 3. Apply by spray, brush, or lamb's wool applicator to approximate coverage of 500 square feet per gallon. 4. Do no apply if the temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS: A. Formwork not.supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. f^� CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 15 CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28-days. Determine potential compressive strength of inplace concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form facing material - may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.11 RE -USE OF FORMS: A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Architect. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS: A. Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Reinforced Masonry: -Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where indicated on the Drawings and as scheduled. Grout shall comply with ASTM C476. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS: A. Patching Defective Areas: 1. Repair and patch defectiveareas with cement mortar immediately after removal. of forms, but only when acceptable to Architect. 2.Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case.to a depth of less than 111. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface . Before placing cement mortar or 03300 --16 CONCRETE WORK CITIBUS 1192-1 proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -.coat the area to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent. 3. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher thansurroundingsurface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. - Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. i C . Repair of Unformed Surfaces: 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to,tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in,addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas ;to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to Architects. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single l holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas r^ to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 17 CITIBUS1192-1 around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix .dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less* than 72 hours. D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by Architect. E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. 3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION: A The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete:ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 3. Air Content -ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is'40 degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. 5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31;- one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. 6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM,C 39; one set for 03300 - 18 'CONCRETE WORK I CITIBUS'1192-1 L, each 100 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. c. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less -� than 85% of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete. C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION 03300 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. r r" CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 19 F CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 03510 - POURED GYPSUM ROOF DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of poured gypsum roof deck is shown on the Drawings. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Concrete Work - Section 03300 B. Steel Joists - Section 05210 C. Built -Up Roofing - Division 7 D. Finish Painting - Division 9 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following standards, except as otherwise indicated. 1. ANSI A 59.1 "Reinforced Gypsum Concrete" 2. ASTM C 317 "Standard Specification for Gypsum Concrete". 3. ASTM C 956 "Installation of Cast -In -Place Reinforced Gypsum Concrete". 4. UL Class 90 Uplift Rating B. Product Data: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications with application and installation instructions for subpurlins, formboards, reinforcements, and gypsum concrete. C. Shop Drawings: submit shop drawings for items of work not clearly dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data, when requested by the Architect. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Placement: Do not mix or place gypsum concrete during weather when the temperature or project exposure will freeze the concrete before chemical set has taken place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS POURED GYPSUM ROOF DECK 03510 - 1 rr I: CITIBUS'1192-1 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Steel Subpurlins: Size and properties as shown on the Drawings. 1. Trussed Tee Type Open web design with upper chord and truss members of ASTM A 82 steel wire; lower.chords of formed steel angles. 2. Shop painted after cutting to required length. r_ B. Cross Tees: 24 gauge minimum sheet metal or hot rolled steel tees, shop painted or galvanized. C. Gypsum Formboards: ASTM C 318, size as shown on the Drawings, with surface treatedspecifically to resist fungus growth. D. Reinforcing Mesh: Woven wire mesh. 1. Woven Wire Fabric: ASTM A 82, galvanized, with 19 gauge wires woven to form 2" hexagonal mesh with 16 gauge wires woven longitudinally at 3" intervals across the width, or equivalent mesh with an effective cross -sectional area of not less than 0.026 sq. in. per f t . of width. E. Gypsum Concretes Pyrofill mill - formulated, composed of y' calcined gypsum and aggregates complying with ASTM C 317 and ANSI A59.1 standards. 1. Provide Class "A" gypsum concrete (500 psi compressive strength) with not more than 12 1/2% weight of approved aggregate. 2. Provide Thermofill gypsum concrete only if approved by the Architect. F. Expansion Joint Filler: Type recommended, by gypsum mill mixture manufacturer. G. Minimum Thicknesses: Follow criteria of ANSI C 956 for determining minimum gypsum concrete thickness, except that there shall be not less than 1/2" of gypsum concrete over the top of subpurlins A. Mix Gypsum Concrete in accordance with mill mixture manufacturer's recommendations for the type of placement (hand or hose) operation employed. Do not exceed the -- amounts of water asv determined by design mix criteria, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. 1. Keep all mixing and placement equipment clean and free of hardened lumps of gypsum concrete. 03510 - 2 POURED GYPSUM ROOF DECK 1 6 . CITIBUS'1192-1 ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which poured gypsum decking is to be installed and notify �-► - the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been �. corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.2 SUBPURLINS AND FORMBOARD SYSTEM: A. Subpurlins: Space subpurlins as required to support formboards. Stagger joints of subpurlins and support on main framing purlins or beams.. Weld to supporting members with fillet welds as shown on the Drawings. 1. After welding, clean welded areas of welding flux, spatter, slag, loose rust and other foreign material and apply touch-up coating of primer before formboard installation. B. Cross Tees: Locate to provide support for formboard ends, as required. C. Formboards: Size to fit snugly at edges and cut to fit accurately at walls, curbs, and openings, as required. : Install with long sides of boards supported on flanges of subpurlins or joists and ends supported on framing members r or cross tees. 1. Caulk (scratch in) joints with gypsum concrete to prevent leakage during placing of main gypsum concrete deck. Do not install more formboards in one day than will have gypsum concrete placed over them during that day. CD. Reinforcement: Lay wire reinforcing over tops of subpurlins. Lap ends not less than 411. Do not lap sides of reinforcement. Cut to fit at walls, curbs, projections and openings. E. Expansion Joints: Provide where indicated, with joints placed between junctures of roof slabs with parapet walls and other roof projections. 3.3 GYPSUM CONCRETE: A. Conveying: Provide adequate equipment and personnel to �• insure a uniform, continuous flow of gypsum concrete at the point of delivery, without segregation and loss of t material. r i. will POURED GYPSUM ROOF DECK 03510 - 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Placing and Finishing: Do not interrupt placement of gypsum concrete until the entire panel or section is completed. Place material in one layer, using techniques so as to minimize deflection of formboard. 1. Immediately after placement, screed and level to the required thickness and trowel to smooth, even plane. Use care to prevent spattering of supporting structure and walls, staining underside of formboards, and to minimize impact of formboards. 2. After main decking is in place, construct cants and other built-up surfaces as required. C. ventilation: Provide adequate underside ventilation and heat, if necessary, after placement of gypsum concrete to insure complete drying of the decking.. D. Cleaning and Repair: After deck has set and before roof application, scrape rough areas smooth, patch uneven areas with fresh gypsum concrete slurry and trowel patches smooth 1. Replace work that is damaged beyond repair as directed by Architect. 2. Promptly clean spatter from exposed walls and supporting structures before it sets. Clean soiled exposed formboard. Remove and replace damaged exposed boards. -_ i END OF SECTION 03510 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. ~ 03510 - 4 POURED GYPSUM ROOF DECK CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Requirements for this section apply to masonry work specified in Division-4 section "Reinforced Unit Masonry". 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and in schedule. B. Type of masonry work required include: 1. Brick masonry. 2. Concrete masonry unit. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. B. Single -Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. C. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of unit masonry, erect sample wall panels to further verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution until approved by Architect. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work: UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 1. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as standard, for judging completed unit masonry construction. ^a 1.4.DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. H. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. 1. Limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units during delivery and until time of installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest project site. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained. E. Store masonry accessories including metal items tb- prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt. 1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.' 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours building masonry walls or columns. C. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. D. Staining: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 04200 - 2 UNIT MASONRY CITIBUS 1192-1 E. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. F. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. G. Cold -Weather Construction: Do not perform masonry work when the weather conditions indicate that temperatures below 40 degrees F. will be encountered within 48 hours of the work. 1. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen. 2. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch. 3. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. BRICK MADE FROM CLAY OR SHALE: A. General: Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated below applicable to each form of brick required: s •fi. Face Brick: ASTM C 216,Grade SW and as follows: 1. Face brick #A shall be Hope Brick Works 1103,4,5,E Velour with grog. Modular or approved equal. 2. Face brick #B shall be Perla #30 (BL 30) Velour with grog Modular or approved equal. .2. Face brick #C shall be Acme.Brick TUP Blend 33 Napa Valley Velour with grog or approved equal. C. Provide Special Brick shapes as required for Face Brick #A, #B & #C. 2.2. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Comply- with referenced standards and other requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit required. 1. Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows: a. For lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 r_ B. Concrete Block: Provide units complying with characteristics indicated below for grade,Type, face size, exposed face, and under each form of block indicated, for weight classification. 1. All concrete masonry units shall be ASTM C90, Grade N, light weight, with a minimum compressive strength of 1900 psi on the net area (f'm = 1500 psi) at 28 days. 2. Size: Manufacturer's standard 2 cell units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual)-x thickness indicated. 3. Type I, moisture -controlled units. a. Cure units by autoclave treatment at a minimum temperature of 350 deg F. (176 deg. C.) and a minimum pressure of 125 psi. 4. Special inspection of construction procedures shall be .. provided by the contractor during construction. 2.3. MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold -weather construction. Provide natural color or — white cement as required to produce requiredmortarcolor. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. For colored pigmented mortars use premixed colored masonry cements of formulation required to produce color indicated, or if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. E. Water: Clean and potable. 2.4. JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES AND ANCHORING DEVICES: .ti A. Material: Comply with requirements.indicated below for basic materials and with requirements indicated under each form of joint reinforcement, tie and anchor for size and other characteristics: B.` Adjustable wall 'reinforcement system._shall be equal to Hohmann & Barnard Truss Type #170 with rectangular wall ties and shall be located 16" vertically unless shown otherwise. 04200 - 4 UNIT MASONRY I I , CITIBUS 1192-1 C. Veneer wall ties shall be equal to Hohmann & Barnard DW-10 Series and shall be located 16".vertically and horizontally unless shown otherwise. 1. For Anchorage to concrete framework, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with dovetail anchor section formed from 0.1046" (12 gauge) thick sheet metal and triangular -shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1" of masonry face. 2. For anchorage to steel framework provide manufacturer's standard anchors with crimped 1/4" diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel and tri-angular shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1" of masonry face. 3. Wire Size: 0.1875" diameter. 4. Wire Size: 0.25" diameter. 2.5. INSULATION A. Loose Granular Perlite Insulation: Expanded perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface -treated for water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or IV (surface -treated for water repellency and to limit dust generation) . R-value of 3.3- - 2.8 Btu/(hr x sf x deg. F.) for densities of 4.1 - 7.4 lbs. per cu. ft. at 75 deg. F (24 deg. C.). B. Loose Granular Vermiculite Insulation: Expanded vermiculite complying with ASTM C 516, Type II (surface -treated for water repellency and limited moisture absorption), Grade 3 (Fine), r-value of 2.3 Btu/ (hr x s.f. x deg. F) at 75 deg. F (24 deg C.). C. Rigid Insulation inserts: Expanded polystyrene inserts equal to Korfil Insulation or .approved equal. D. Insulation shall be provided in all exterior walls separating an interior space from the exterior plus as indicated on the drawings. 2.6. MASONRY CLEANERS. A. Where existing masonry walls are to. remain in interior spaces masonry surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter. B. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2-cup dry measure) and laundry detergent (1/2-cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water. �, UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 C. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength, general- purpose cleaner designed for new masonry, surfaces of type. indicated; composed of blended organic and inorganic acids combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. �- 2.7. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer; comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing times and water content. C.- Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement- lime. 2. Use Type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact with earth, and where indicated. 3. Use Type S mortar for reinforced masonry and where �7 indicated. 4. Use Type N mortar for exterior, above -grade loadbearing and nonloadbearing walls and parapet walls; for interior loadbearing walls; for interior nonloadbearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated. 2.8. DAMPPROOFING A. Acceptable Product: "Hydrocide 700 Mastic" !' manufactured by Sonneborn or approved equal. 2.9. LAMINATED COMPOSITION SHEET FLASHING A. Copper/Paper flashing: 3oz. copper sheet laminated between 2 sheets of bituminious impregnated Kraft paper or saturated fabric. 04200 - 6 UNIT MASONRY i CITIBUS 1192-1 r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Wetting Clay Brick: Wet brick made from clay or shale which have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 grams per 20 sq. in. per minute. Use wetting methods which ensure each clay masonry unit being nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. B. Do not wet concrete masonry units. C. Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcing. D. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. E. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. F. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. G. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. 1. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. 3.2. CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arrises do not exceed 1/411 in 101, or 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20', nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40'or more. For vertical alignment of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 1011, 1/2" maximum. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 7 CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Variations from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements in 10' or 1/16" within width of a single unit. 3.3. LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement -type joints,- returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern shown or, if not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in course .above and below. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2- unit length for one-half running bond or.1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly (if required), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. E. Built -In Work: As construction progresses, build -in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 04200 - 8 UNIT MASONRY .,, "� I 3.4. MORTAR"BEDDING AND JOINTING CITIBUS '1192-1 A. Lay brick size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed.webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness; unless otherwise indicated. D. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove 'units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. 3.5. STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY A. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, unless otherwise shown. 1. For horizontally reinforced masonry, provide continuity at corners with prefabricated "L" units, in addition to masonry bonding. B. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and space as follows: 1. Provide individual metal ties. 2. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement using prefabricated "T " units. C. Intersecting Load -Bearing Walls: If Carried up separately, block or tooth vertical joint 8" maximum offsets and provide rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" o.c. vertically or omit blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at no more than 2'-0" o.c. vertically. Form anchors of galvanized steel not less than 1-1/2" x 1/4" x 2'-0" long with ends turned up not less than 2" or with cross pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar -filled cores. UNIT MASONRY f 04200 - 9 CITIBUS 1192-1 D. Nonbearing Interior Partitions: Build full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless r shown otherwise. 3.6. HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. - General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. r C. Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically noted to be omitted. L D. Reinforce the following walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcement 1. Single wythe walls. 2. Multi-wythe walls with one or more stack bond wythes. 3. Hollow concrete masonry walls. 4. Multi wythe masonry 'walls. r. E. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and 'IT" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. r. 3.7. ANCHORING MASONRY WORK A. General: Provide anchor devices of type indicated. B. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. r 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally. 04200 - 10 UNIT MASONRY CITIBUS 1192-1 3.8. CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in -plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Build flanges of metal expansion_ strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any. C. Build flanges of factory -fabricated expansion joint units into masonry. D. Build in non-metallic joint fillers where indicated. E. Build in horizontal pressure -relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an air space or inserting non-metallic compressible joint filler of width required to permit installation of sealant and backer rod. 3.9.- LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than V -0" for brick size units and 2'-0":for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or formed -in -place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed -in -place lintels. 1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. C. 3.10. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. FLASHING OF MASONRY WORK A. General:- Provide concealed flashing in masonry work at or above, shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, so as to divert such water to the exterior. and where indicated. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 11 CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Prepare masonry surfaces so that they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic before covering with mortar. Extend flashing through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. C. Extend flashing the full length of lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each end. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches, and through the inner wythe to within 1/2 inches of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2 inches. At heads and sills, turn up ends not less than 2 inches to form a pan. D. Interlock end joints of deformed metal flashings by overlapping deformations not less than 1-1/2 inches and seal lap with elastic sealant. E. Install flashing to comply with manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above concealed r. fleshings. Space 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. G. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where shown or required to be built into masonry work. 3.11. INSTALLATION OF DAMPPROOFING A. Install materials only when ambient temperature exceeds 40 degrees Fahrenheit. B. Provide surfaces to receive dampproofing which are dry prior to application of materials. C. Provide surfaces to receive dampproofing which arer clean, and free of voids, loose aggregate, fins or projections, or other deleterious materials. ti D. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions prior to application of dampproofing. E. Trowel dampproofing on designated surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations and as indicated on the drawings. 04200 - 12 UNIT MASONRY CITIBUS 1192-1 F.' Repair damaged areas of dampproofing prior to covering by patching with materials as recommended by manufacturer. r+ 3.12. REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING r, A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if -units do not match ° adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. 7 Point -up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: r t 1. Remove large mortar y hand with wooden g particles b paddles ' and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. q 5. Clean brick by means of bucket and brush hand -cleaning I method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 20 Revised" to clean brick masonry made from clay or shale, except use masonry cleaner indicated below: a. Detergent. b. Acidic cleaner: apply in compliance with directions of cleaner manufacturer. ` 6. Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry I(� manufacturer's directions and applicable NCMA "TEK" bulletins. i UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 13 i y CITIBUS 1192-1 r. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry _ is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. A END OF SECTION 04200 t- ti r 04200 - 14 UNIT MASONRY f CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 04230 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on,Drawings and in schedules. Requirements of Section 04200, Unit Masonry, apply to work of this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. General: Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for masonry materials and accessories not included in this section. B. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars of following g grades complying with ASTM A 615 and as follows: 1. Provide Grade 60, except that No. 3 ties and may be Grade 40. =: 2. Shop -fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLACING REINFORCING: A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with, reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 1 r� F CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater). C. For columns and piers, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as shown, but not less than 1 1/2 times the nominal bar diameter or 1 1/2", whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties as shown. D. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the Architect. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise shown. E. Provide not less than minimum lap shown, or if not shown, as required by governing code. F. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum mortar cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. G. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcing as the work progresses, with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap units not less than 6" at ends. Use prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide continuity at corners and intersections unless shown otherwise. Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. H. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structures as indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for general installation requirements of unit masonry. B. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork. C. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape r, during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. D. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight 04230 - 2 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY W CITIBUS 1192-1 f and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during construction. R E. Allow not less than the following minimum time to elapse after completion of the member before removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been fi obtained during the curing period. 1. 10 days for beams. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY: A. General: 1. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths ' shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8" joints. 3. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed joints. B. Walls: 1. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 running bond v with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course at corners and intersections unless shown otherwise. Use special -shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. 2. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. 3. where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or modify units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcing bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non -reinforced vertical cells, or provide 4 units with solid bottoms. C. Columns and Piers: ' 1. Use CMU units of the size, shape and number of vertical core spaces shown. If not shown, use units which provide minimum clearances and grout coverage for i. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 3 r CITIBUS 1192-1 number and size of vertical reinforcing bars shown. 2. Provide pattern bond shown, or if not shown, alternate head joints in vertical alignment. D. Grouting: 1. Use "Fine Grout" for filling spaces less than 4" in both horizontal directions. 2. Use "Coarse Grout" for filling 4" spaces or larger in both horizontal directions. E. Grouting Technique: Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to the requirements which follow. F. Low -Lift Grouting: 1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical cores to be grouted. 2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. 3. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if bond beam occurs below 5 feet height, stop pour at course below bond beam. 4. Pour grout using container with spout or by chute. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1 1/2" below top course of pour. 5. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1 1/2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. G. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper position. Clean top surfaces of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures'to resist grout pressures. H. Grout Placing: I. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations. 2. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable to the Architect. 04230 - 4 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 1 � CITIBUS 1192-1 3. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 5 feet. Allow not less than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation. 4. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top ' of pour, fill bond beam course to within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. 5. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1 1/2" of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. END OF SECTION 04230 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 5 l: CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including 4 General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the Drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required. B. Structural steel is that work defined in the RISC "Code of t Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on the Drawings. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Reinforcing steel - Section 03300 B. Steel Joists - Section 05210 C. Metal Decking - Section 05300 D. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications - Section 05500 E. Metal Building Components - Section 13130 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following except as otherwise indicated: 1. RISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all ! responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration .of connections developed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings." 2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design", Ninth Edition, and including the "Commentary" and supplements p thereto as issued. 3. RISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code 5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use". B. Qualifications for Welding Work: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. 3. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the Contractor's responsibility. C-. Source Quality Control: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and. field, conducted by a qualified inspection ,agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 2. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. D. Design of Members and Connections: 1. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. verify dimensions at the site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. 2. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings, Structural Steel: 1. Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a registered professional engineer including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of` members, and details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. 2. Architect's review of shop drawings will be for general considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials fabrication and erection of structural steel is the Contractor's responsibility. 3. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Provide setting drawings,, templates,, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages r 05120 -- 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL P CITIBUS 1192-1 to be installed.by others. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay that work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. D. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36, except where other type steel is shown. B. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A 501 D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated. ¢ E. Headed Stud Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finished carbon steel; with dimensions complying with RISC Specifications. F. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: 1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM.A 325. G. Concrete Expansion Anchors: Wedge type anchors meeting Federal 'Specification FF-S-325 INT AMD .3, Group II, Type 4, Class 1. H. Electrodes for -Welding: Comply with AWS Code. I. Structural -Steel Primer Paint: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" STRUCTURAL STEEL 05.120 - 3 f CITIBUS 1192-1 primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; - complying with performance requirements for FS TT-P-645A. J. Non -Metallic Non -Shrink Grout: Pre -mixed, non-metallic, non -corrosive, non -staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CE CRD-C 621. ` 1. Provide non-metallic, non -shrink grout as manufactured by one of the following: a. Masterflow 713; Master Builders. b. Upcon; Upco Chem. Div., USM Corp. c. Sealtite 588; W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2.2 FABRICATION: A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: -- 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with RISC Specifications and as indicated on the final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown. - 2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of -- materials. 3. where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces on members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. B. Connections: 1. weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. 2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 3. Provide high -strength threaded fasteners for • all principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are shown. C. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high -strength f= threaded fasteners in accordance with RISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts". D. Welded Construction: 1. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, --and methods used in correcting 05120 - 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL {T` 1. CITIBUS 1192-1 welding work. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. E. Stud Connectors: 1. Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer of the, stud connectors. Shop weld stud connectors, as shown, to bearing or embedded plates. .; Use automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. F. Holes for Other Work: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.. G. Splicing: 1. Splicing of beams shall be as -shown on the Drawings. All other splicing shall be made only with the written consent of the Architect and/or Engineer. When approved, copies of weld tests shall be furnished to the Architect and Engineer. 2.3 -SHOP PAINTING: A. General: 1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on the exposed portions and the initial 2" of embeddedareas only. 2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded. 3. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to. be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and splatter, _slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 1. SP-2 -"Hand Tool Cleaning", or 2. SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or, STRUCTURAL STEEL r 05120 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 C. 3. SP-7 "Brush-off Blast Cleaning". Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to, provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and all exposed surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: 3.2 A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. ERECTION: A. General: Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as herein specified. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds. C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete the work. D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish 'anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in -place work. 1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. 2. 'Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor bolt installation requirements in concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation. E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 2. Set loose and attached base plates and.bearing plates 05120 - 6 STRUCTURAL STEEL 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 for structural members on wedges or other, adjusting devices. 3. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions, or as otherwise required. F. Field Assembly: 1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 2. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISC tolerances. 3. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean operating temperature of the structure. Make allowances for the difference between temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service. 4. Splice members only where shown or specified. G. Erection Bolts: on exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. B. Comply with RISC Specifications: For bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. I. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. J. Gas -Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to the [� Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. K. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or 7 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 7 CITIBUS 1192--1 spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. L. Stud connectors shall be installed on all bearing or embedded plates. Number of shear connectors required is shown on the plans. Use automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION 05120 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. ` V C 05120 -'8 STRUCTURAL STEEL CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS r PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of steel joists is shown on the Drawings, including basic layout and type of joists required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Provide joists fabricated in compliance with the following, and as herein specified. 1. SJI "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight J Tables" for: a. K-Series Open Web Steel Joists b. CS -Series Open Web Steel Joists (Equal to Vulcraft) B. Qualification of Welding Work: 1. Joint connections and splices of joist members shall be made by welding and shall comply with the SJI "Standard Specifications and "Technical Digest #8 - Welding of Open Web Steel Joists". 2. Joists welded in place may be subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of the steel joists for testing purposes will be borne by the.Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove and replace any work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data, Steel Joists: 1. Joist manufacturer shall be a member of the Steel Joist Institute. 2. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of joist and its accessories. Include manufacturer's certification that joists comply with SJI "Standard Specifications". Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been distributed to the Erector. B Steel Joists: . Shop Drawings, St 1 Joi s: 1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, E' STEEL JOISTS 05210 �1 CITIBUS-1192-1 special connections, jointing and accessories.. Include the mark, number, type, location and spacing of joists and bridging. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI "Standard Specifications". Handle and store joists in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses. B. Joists shall be delivered to the jobsite in an upright position and shall be unloaded with a two point sling on a winch line from a crane or winch truck. Allowing joists to fall from the bed of a truck will not be permitted. C. Store joists in an upright position with blocking spaced not more than 15 feet on center. Brace joists in an upright position until hoisted onto structure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications" B. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular hexagon type, low carbon steel. C. Steel Prime Paint: - Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications", except asphalt type paint not permitted. 2.2 FABRICATIONS A. General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications". B. Extended Ends: Provide extended ends on joists where shown, complying with the manufacturer's standards and requirements of applicable SJI "Standard Specifications" and load tables C. Ceiling Extensions are not required. D. Bridging: 1. Provide horizontal type bridging for "open web" joists, complying with SJI "Standard Specifications". 2 Provide bridging anchors for ends of all bridging lines terminated at walls or beams. E. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages to secure joists to adjacent construction, complying with SJI "Standard Specifications", unless otherwise indicated. r- 05210 2 STEEL JOISTS CITIBUS 1192-1 F. Shop Painting: r 1. Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign f materials from fabricated joists and accessories before application of shop paint. 2. Apply one shop coat of steel joist primer paint to steel joists and accessories, by spray, dipping, or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTIONS A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which steel joists are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. 3.2 ERECTION: A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard Specifications", final shop drawings, and as herein specified. B. Bearing Plates: 1. Furnish bearing plates to be built into the concrete and masonry construction. a. Refer to Division 4 sections for installation of bearing plates set in masonry. C. Placing Joists: 1. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening. 2. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction. D. Bridging: 1. Install bridging simultaneously joist joist erection, before any construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where ! terminated at walls or beams. E. Fastening Joists: 1. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Standard specifications" for the type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 3 rl CITIBUS 1192-1 procedure with the placing of joists 2. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with. SJI "Standard Specifications" for the type' of joists used. 3. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for bolted connections, unless otherwise indicated. F. Touch -Up Painting: 1. After joist installation, paint all field bolt heads L and nuts, and welded areas, abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting. Use the same type of paint as used for shop painting. END OF SECTION 05210 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. 05210 4 'STEEL JOISTS CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 05300 - METAL ROOF DECKING r PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of metal roof decking is shown,on the Drawings, including basic layout and type of deck units required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members". 2. AWS "Structural Welding Code". 3. SDI "Steel Roof Deck Design Manual". B. Qualification of Welding Work: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Decking welded in place is subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of decking for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work. `�. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Compute the properties of metal roof deck sections on j the basis of the effective design width as limited by the provisions of the AISI Specifications. Provide not less than the deck section properties shown, including ?� section modulus and moment of inertia per foot of width. 2. Allowable Deflection: Design and fabricate deck for a maximum deflection of 1/240 of the clear span under it the total uniform dead and live load. 3. Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of 45 lbs. per sq. ft. at eave overhang and 30 lbs . per sq. ft. for other roof areas. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: METAL ROOF:.DECKING 05300 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 A. Manufacturer's Data: 1. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each product specified. Include manufacturer's certification as may be required to show compliance with 'these specifications. Indicate by transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been distributed to the Installer. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of deck panels, anchorage details and every condition requiring closure panels, supplementary framing, special jointing or other accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Steel for galvanized Finish: ASTM A 446, Grade A. B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36. C. Galvanizing: ASTM A 525, G60. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc -dust content paint for repair of damaged galvanized surfaces complying with Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships). E. Flexible Closure Strips for Deck: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. 2.2 FABRICATION: A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports with flush, telescoped or nested 2" end laps and nesting side laps, unless otherwise indicated. Provide deck configurations complying with SDI "Basic Design Specifications", and as specified herein. B. Intermediate -Rib Deck: Depth approximately 1 1/211; ribs spaced approximately 61, o.c.; width of rib opening at roof surface not more than 1 3/411; width of bottom rib surface not less than 1/211. C. Roof Sump Pans: 1. Fabricate from a single piece of not less than 14 gauge galvanized sheet steel of the same quality as the deck units; with level bottoms'and'sloping sides to direct water flow to the drain, unless otherwise shown. Provide sump pans of adequate size to receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3" wide. 05300 - 2 METAL ROOF DECKING i IF CITIBUS 1192-1 Recess pans not less than 1 1/2" below the roof deck surface, unless otherwise shown or required by deck configuration. Holes for drains will be cut in the field. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which metal roof decking items are to beinstalledand notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Generals Install roof deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and final shop drawings, and as specified herein. B. Placing Roof Deck Units: 1. Place roof deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends bearing on supporting members and accurately aligned end to end before being permanently fastened. Lap ends .not less than 2". Do not stretch or contract the sidelap interlocks. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive deflection. 2. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured properly and is dry. 3. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. 4. Do not use deck units for storage or working platform until permanently secured. C. Fastening Deck Units: 1. Permanently fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members with 1/2" x l" fusion welds, not more than 12" o.c..at supports and edge angles. 2. Use welding washers when welding 22 gauge ,or thinner steel roof deck. 3. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal -arc welding, the appearance and quality of welds, and the methods. used in correcting welding work. 4. Lock side laps between adjacent deck units with #12-14 TERS/1 self -drilling screws. Provide minimum 2 per span. r -METAL ROOF DECKING 05300 - 3 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 D. Cutting and Fitting: 1. Cut and fit roof -deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the roof '- decking, as shown on the Drawings. Provide neat, square and trim cuts. E. Reinforcement at Openings: 1.' Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking and support of other work, unless otherwise shown. 2. Reinforce roof decking around openings less than 15" in any dimension by means of a flat steel sheet placed over the opening and fusion welded to the top surface of the deck. Provide steel sheet of the same quality as the deck units, not less than 20 gauge, and at least 1 12" wider and longer than the opening. Provide welds at each corner and spaced not more than 12" o.c. along each side. F. Ridge and Valley Plates: 1. Weld ridge and valley plates to the top surface of the roof decking. Lap end joints not less than 311, with laps made in the direction of water flow. G. Closure Strips: 1. Provide metal closure strips at all open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking, and in the voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. H. Roof Insulation Supports 1. Provide metal closure strips for the support of roof insulation where the rib openings in the top surface of roof decking occur adjacent to edges and openings. Weld closure strips into position. 3.3 TOUCH-UP PAINTING: A. After roof decking installation, wire brush, clean and _ paint scarred areas, welds and rust spots on the top and bottom surfaces of decking units and. supporting steel A members. B. Tough -up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. .- END'OF SECTION 05300 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. 05300• - 4 METAL ROOF `'DECKING r CSTIBUS.1192-1 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to.work of this section. r 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of miscellaneous metal work is shown on the Drawings and includes items fabricated from metal shapes, plates, angles and pipe which are not apart of structural steel or other metal systems in other sections of these r- specifications. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Concrete Work - Section 03300 B. Structural Steel - Section 05120 C. Painting - Section 09900 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation. of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. er B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete for installation of miscellaneous metal work. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. r; 1. See Section 03300, Concrete Work, for installation of inserts and anchorage devices. C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer s Data, Miscellaneous Metal. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and installation instructions for products METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 CITIBUS 1192--1 to be used in the fabrication of miscellaneous metal work. Including paint products. Indicate by transmittal that copy of instructions has been distributed to Installer. B. Shop Drawings, Miscellaneous Metal: Submit 5'copies of shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal assemblies. Include plans, elevations, details, sections and connections. Show anchorages and accessory items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A'. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes -- including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. B. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. C. Steel Tubing: Hot -formed, welded or seamless, ASTM A 501. D. All galvanizing shall be .hot dipped galvanizing, ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 386. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; type as selected; Grade A; black, finish unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise shown or specified. F. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type, galvanized ferrous casting, either malleable iron ASTM A 47 or cast steel ASTM A 27; provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized ASTM A 1530 G. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, complying with FS r FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. H. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, 'Universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; complying with performance requirements for FS TT-P-645. 2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness shown, .or if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of 05500 - 2 METAL' FABRICATIONS { CITIBUS 1192-1 work. �., B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/321, unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. r C. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS Code. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown, or if not shown, phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. E. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate. and space anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for intended use. F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to receive finish hardware and similar items. G. Shop Painting: 1. Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise specified. 2. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning: or SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning:, or SSPC SP-7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning". 3. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning". 4. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. 5. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS: A. Carpenter's Iron Work: Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or �., METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 1� CITIBUS 1192-1 securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are required under other sections. B. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; -- elsewhere, furnish steel washers. C. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous .units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates and minimum joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. D. Perimeter Angles: Furnish and install continuous angles at edge of gypsum deck where indicated and frame all openings in same as noted or detailed. Furnish all _ necessary clips or supports. E. Ladder: Shall comply with ASNI A14.3,,Safety Code for Fixed Ladders. 1. Unless otherwise shown, provide ladder with 1/2"x2 1/2" continuous flat steel bar side rails with eased edges spaced 18" apart. Provide 3/4" diameter solid steel bar rungs spaced 12" o.c. fit into centerline of side rails, plug welded and ground smooth on outer face. .2. Support side rails at top and bottom and at intermediate points not more than 5'-0" o.c. with welded steel brackets attached to wall to hold ladder clear of wall a minimum of 7" from wall to centerline of rungs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Anchorages: Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages,.such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. B. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage r 05500 - 4 METAL FABRICATIONS CITIBUS 1192-1 (~ devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal items to in -place constructions; �., including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal items. Set work accurately in location alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing of anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. F. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. END OF SECTION 05500 This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc. r 17 FMETAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 i� CITIBUS 1192-1 t SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL I.I. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUMMARY: A. Types of work in this section include rough carpentry for: 1. Wood framing. 2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking. 3. Wood furring. B. Finish carpentry is specified in another section within Division 6. 1.3. DEFINITIONS: A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. 1.4. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for materials listed. B. Material Certificates: Where dimensional lumber is provided to"comply with minimum allowable unit stresses, submit listing of species and grade selected for each use, and submit evidence of compliance with specified requirements. Compliance may be in -form of a signed copy of applicable portion of lumber producer's grading rules showing design values for selected species and grade. Design values shall be as approved by the Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee. 61 C. Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installation and finishing r of treated material. t' ROUGH CARPENTRY 17 06100 - 1 7 CITIBUS 1192-1 1. Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained and conformance with applicable standards. 2. For water -borne treatment include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site. 3. Fire -Retardant Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that treated material complies with specified standard and other requirements. 1.5. PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. --- Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surf aces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other. work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. LUMBER, GENERAL: A. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Grade Stamps: Factory -mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 05100 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as follows: B. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. C. Grade: Standard Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber as required.. No. 3 Common or Standard grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or No. 3 boards per SPIB rules. 2.3. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended, by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications { for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use t^ including recommended nails. t 1 1. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153). B. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I; asphalt saturated felt, non -perforated, 15-lb. type. 2.4. WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS: A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated yyr as "Trt-Wd" or "Treated", or is specified herein to be I treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements. 1. Pressure -treat above -ground items with water -borne preservatives to comply with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, 11 kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: Ti ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 `I CITIBUS 1192-1 a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing. b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. c. Wood framing members less than 18" above grade. d. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs -- directly in contact with earth. 2. Pressure -treat the following with water -borne preservatives for ground contact use complying with AWPB LP-22: a. Wood members in contact with ground. -- b. Wood members in contact with fresh water. 3. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. B. Fire -Retardant Treatment: Where fire -retardant treated wood ("FRTW") is indicated, pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire -retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated below; identify "FRTW" lumber with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and cut and fitted. C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. D. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 06100 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY E. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 3.2. WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS: A. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key -bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide. and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3. WOOD FURRING: A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required tolerance of finished work. 1. Firestop furred spaces on walls at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story, with wood blocking or noncombustible materials, accurately fitted to close furred spaces. B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Drywall: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1" x 2" furring at 16" o.c., vertically. C. Furring to Receive Plaster Lath: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1" x 2" furring at 16" o.c., vertically. D. Suspended Furring: Provide size and spacing shown, including hangers and attachment devices. Level to a tolerance of 1/6" in 101, except 1/4" in 10' for thick -coat plaster work. +7, fiROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 3.4. WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL: A. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with recommendations of "Manual for House Framing" of National Forest Products Association (N.F.P.A). Do not splice structural members between supports. B. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with "Recommended �- Nailing Schedule" of "Manual for House Framing" and "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" published by N.F.P.A. END OF SECTION 06100 06100 - 6 ROUGH CARPENTRY .CITIBUS 1192-1 a, SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL I.I. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division l Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood cabinets (casework). 2. Laminate clad cabinets (plastic -covered casework). 3. Cabinet tops (countertops). 4. Cabinet Hardware. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed to view. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division.l Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product and process specified in this section and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. C. Shop drawings showing -location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. D. Samples for initial selection purposes of the following in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1. Plastic laminate. F INTERIORIARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1 T r- CITIBUS 1192-1 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work. B. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) except as otherwise indicated. 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored _in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions." 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture .. content from date of installation through remainder of construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. O6402 - 2 INTERIOR'ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK CITIBUS 1192-1 r- PART 2 - PRODUCTS t 2.1. HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high pressure decorative laminates which may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: 1. Formica Corp. 2. Micarta Div., Westinghouse Electric Corp. 3. Nevamar Corp. 4. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. 2.2. MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI woodworking standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards, that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4 2. High Pressure Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 3. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2. 4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 5. Softwood Plywood: PS 1. 2.3. FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as r necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for 7 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 17 CITIBUS 1:192-1 fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. D. Factory -cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant coating. 2.4. ARCHITECTURAL CABINET TOPS (COUNTERTOPS) A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400C. B. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the following: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface: High pressure decorative laminate as follows:. "- a. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1) Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors and finishes in the following categories: a) Solid colors. b) Wood grains. c) Patterns. �. b. Grade: GP-50 (0.050-inch nominal thickness). 3. Edge Treatment:Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 2.5. WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK) FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400A "Wood Cabinets." B. Grade: Custom. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal Overlay. 06402 - 4 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK CITIBUS 1192-1 1. Reveal Dimension: 3/4 inch. & D. Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: Red Oak, plain sawn. E. Wood Species for Semiexposed Surfaces: Match species and cut indicated for exposed surfaces. i" 2.6. INTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS ORNAMENTAL ITEMS FOR OPAQUE FINISH C. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700. D. Grade: Custom. E. Lumber Species: Any closed -grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard. 2.7. FASTENERS AND ANCHORS F. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements. 1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer. r f G. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. H. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average in installation areas before prevailing humidity conditions installing. B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5 F CITIBUS 1192-1 C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop - fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.2. INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including tops) and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. F. Complete the finishing work specified in this section to whatever extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. G. Refer to the Division 9 sections for final_ finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.3. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. '3.4. PROTECTION 06402 - 6 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK r i CITIBUS 1192-1 A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration a+ time of Substantial Completion. 3.5. CABINET HARDWARE A. Cabinet Hardware as follows: 1. Pulls: Stanley #4484 US10 (2 pulls on drawers over 30 inches wide). 2. Door Hinges: Grass #1200 with #1000 backplate. 3. Drawer Guides: K&V #1429 full extension slides. 4. Adjustable Shelves: K&V #335 pins in 1/4" (32mm holes). B. Display Case: each to have: 1. Contiuous hinges shall be equal to Stanley #314 US10. 2. Cylinder locks shall be LAMP #3310 by Sugatsune America, Inc. 3. Surface bolt shall be Stanley CD4060 2-1/2". 4. Chain bolt shall be Stanley SP1055 3". r J r END OF SECTION 06402 r 11 +I' INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 7 r SECTION 07312 CLAY ROOFING TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS CITIBUS 1192-1 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, Poll including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Install Clay Roofing Tile and related required roofing items where indicated on the drawings. B. Related work specified elsewhere: :Section 07600 FLASHING AND SHEETMETAL and Section 07700 ROOFING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification of Installer: Minimum of three years previous experience installing similar roofing tiles. B. Acceptable .Manufacturers: United States Tile Company, Ludowici-Celadon or approved equal. C. Install tiles in strict accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE. -AND HANDLING A. Deliver tiles with manufacturer's labels intact. B. Store material on raised platforms and protect with covering at outdoor locations. C. Job Conditions: Do not install underlayment or tiles on wet surface. I 7 CLAY ROOFING TILES 07312 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Clay Roofing Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 100sq. ft. for roofing tile and 20 lin.ft. of each type of trim units. 1.6 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY: A. Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer of primary roofing materials and his authorized Installer, agreeing to replace/repair defective materials and workmanship as required to maintain roofing system in waterproof condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Performance: Provide roofing materials recognized to be of generic type indicated and tested to show compliance with indicated performance, or provide other similar materials certified, in writing by manufacturer to be equal to, or better than, the material specified, and acceptable to the Architect. B. Compatibility: Provide products that are recommended by manufacturers to be fully compatible with indicated substrates, or provide separation materials as required to eliminate contact between incompatible materials 2.2 ROOFING TILES A. Spanish tile shall be equal to One -Piece "S" Roof Tile equal to the manufacture of United States Tile Co., color(s) as selected by the Architect. 07312 - 2 CLAY-ROOFING.TILES CITIBUS 1192-1 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Ridge closure: manufacturer's standard B. Eave closure: manufacturer's standard C. Four-way Hip closure: manufacturer's standard D. Bird -Stop: manufacturer's standard E. Nails: Copper nails,length as required to adequately penetrate deck. F. Base Sheet: ASTM D-226, asphalt saturated, organic unperforated, 40 lbs. minimum. G. Ply Sheets: ASTM-2178, Type IV, asphalt impregnated fiberglass felt PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Insure that work penetrating roof surface has been completed to the extent that tiles can be applied. B. Examine surfaces to receive tile to assure they are rigid, even and free of debris.' C. Check that flashing has been installed. D. Do not apply materials over wet substrate. E. Do not proceed with installation of tiles until defects are corrected. 3.2 ROOF APPLICATION A. Felt: Nail on asphalt.felt base sheet parallel to eaves. Lap 2 1/2" horizontally and 6" vertically. Fasten with large headed galvanized nails. Solid mop on two (2) ply sheets with hot asphalt. CLAY ROOFING TILES 07312 - 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Flashings: At sides of vertical surfaces extend .r base f 1 ashing at 1 east 6" up wal 1, 4 " under t i 1 es and turn up edge 2". At fronts, extend flashing at least 3" up wall and 4" over tiles. Install expansion joint fleshings as detailed or as required to insure a weathertight installation. C. Laying ridges: Lay tile exposure with lap as required, fasten with copper nails. Fasten tiles overlapping sheet metal with wire and elastic cement. Cement ridges in laps and fasten with copper nails. Cement small pieces of graduated tiles with elastic cement. 3.3 CLEAN AND ADJUST: A. Replace damaged tiles, remove excess materials and debris from project site. END OF SECTION 07312 07312 - 4 CLAY ROOFING TILES - t CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 07511 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL r 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Modified Bitumen roof membrane with mineral surface cap sheet. B. This Section also includes the following roofing related work: r, 1. Roof Insulation C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: ,., 1. Division 3 Section "Poured Gypsum Roof Deck" 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Roof Decking" 3. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and wood cants. 4. Division 7 Section "Clay Roofing Tiles" for clay tile roofing. 5. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for ■- metal counter flashings. 6. Division 7 Section "Roof Specialties & Accessories" 7. Division 15: For roof drains. 1.3. DEFINITIONS A. Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of insulating materials are designated by "R-values," they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value). B. Thermal Resistance: Where thermal resistance properties of insulating materials are designated by "R-values," they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductance (C-value). j� MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING �I 07511 - 1 F CITIBUS 1192-1 1.4. SUBMITTALS _ A. Product Data, including manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, and recommendations for each type of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer _ ("Roofer") to perform roofing work who has specialized in the installation of roofing systems similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to by manufacturer of primary roofing materials. 1. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification from manufacturer of roofing system certifying that Installer is approved by manufacturer for installation of specified roofing system. Provide copy of certification to Architect prior to award of roofing work. 2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman who is on jobsite-during times that roofing work is in progress and who is experienced in installation of roofing systems similar to type and scope required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain primary products, including each type of roofing sheet (felt), bitumen, composition fleshings, and vapor retarder (if any), from a -' single manufacturer. Provide secondary products as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with roofing system specified. C. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance on roofing and associated work. D. UL Listing: Provide built-up roofing system and component materials that have been tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for Class A external fire exposure. _ E. Preliminary Roofing Conference: As soon as possible after award of built-up roofing work, meet with Installer (Roofer), installers of substrate construction (decks) and other work adjoining roof system including penetrating work 07511 - 2 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING CITIBUS 1192-1 and rooftop units, Architect, Owner, and representatives of other entities directly concerned with performance of roofing system including (as applicable) Owner's insurers and test agencies. 1. Review requirements (Contract Documents), submittals, status of coordinating work, availability of materials, and installation facilities and establish preliminary installation schedule. Review requirements for inspections, testing, certifications, forecasted weather conditions, governing regulations, insurance requirements, and proposed installation procedures. F. Preapplication Roofing Conference: Approximately two weeks prior to scheduled commencement of built-up roofing installation and associated work, meet at project site with Installer, installer of each component of associated work, installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work, installers of rooftop units and other work in and'around roofing that must precede or follow roofing work (including mechanical work if any), Architect, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of the work, including (where applicable) Owner's insurers, test agencies, and governing authorities. 1. Review foreseeable methods and,procedures related to roofing work, including but not necessarily limited to the following: a. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss condition of substrate, roof drains, curbs, penetrations, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work (� only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will t permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements. 1.7. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle roofing materials in a manner that will ensure that there is no possibility of significant moisture pickup. Store in a dry, well -ventilated, weather -tight place. Unless protected from weather or other moisture sources, do not leave unused felts on the roof overnight or MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07511 - 3 r_ CITIBUS 1192-1 when roofing work is not in progress. Store rolls of felt and othersheetmaterials on end on pallets or other raised surface. Handle and store materials or equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of deck. 1.8. - WARRANTIES A. Special Project Warranty: Submit 2 -executed copies of standard 10-year "Roofing Guarantee" on form approved by Architect, covering work of this section including roofing membrane, flashing, roof insulation, vapor retarders (if any), and roofingaccessories, signed and countersigned by Installer (Roofer) and Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. ROOF INSULATION: Insulation under Built-up roofing at new addition shall have an "R" value rating of not less then R- 19. A. Urethane Board Roof Insulation: Rigid, closed -cell, polyurethane boards of thicknesses indicated, with aged k- value of 0.17, (aged at 50 percent R.H. and 73 deg F (23 deg C) for 180 days), 1.5-pounds per cu. ft. minimum density, with integrally bonded asphalt -impregnated felt covering on both faces. Provide in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1. Composite Type: In lieu of bottom felt cover, provide 3/4-inch-thick, integrally bonded course of rigid, perlite- or mineral -fiber insulation board to form composite board with urethane insulation. B. Polyisocyanurate Foam Board Insulation: Rigid boards of minimum 2.0 lb./cu. ft. density polyisocyanurate based foam core, permanently bonded to roofing felt facer sheets. Provide in thickness indicated, with minimum aged K-value of 0.17 (when conditioned per RIC/TIMA Bulletin NO. 281-1). 1. Composite Type: Provide composite type equal to Celotex Hy -Therm COMPOSITE roof insulation. 2.2. ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM: The roofing system shall be Class 'B' (Class A) of "F12" as defined and required by the Uniform Building Code 1991 Edition. A. Modified Bitumen Roofing: Shall be equal to Siplast Paradiene 20/30 FR modified bitumen roofing system. 07511 - 4 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING r" CITIBUS 1192-1 1. Base Sheet; Paradiene 20 2. Top Sheet; Paradiene 30 3. Vertical flashings; Veral B. Other Approved Manufacturers: 1. Tamko #101 Awaplan Premium FR 2. GAF #NN-1-lMB with Ruberoid MB FR Plus membrane and granular finished parapet flashing. 3. Nord Bitumi system with Nordflex Ultra membrane and granular finished parapet flashing. 4. Manville system with Dynakap FR membrane and granular finished parapet flashing. C. Provide manufacturer's standard roof walkway system. Granular finish color shall be a contrasting color with that of the typical roof finish. 2.3. SHEET METAL ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Refer to Section 07600, "FLASHING AND SHEET METAL." B. Zinc -Coated Steel: ASTM A 526/A 526M, with 0.20 percent f- copper, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where y indicated for painting; 0.0359 inches thick (22 gage), except as otherwise indicated. C. Solder for Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated or recommended by metal manufacturer, provide 50/50 tin/lead type (ASTM B 32) for tinning and soldering :joints; use rosin flux. 2.4. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Wood Members, Units: Comply with requirements of "Carpentry" sections of these specifications for nailers, walkway units, and other wood members indicated as roofing system work. Provide wood pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for above -ground use (AWPB LP-2). B. Substrate Joint Tape: 6-inch or 8-inch-wide coated glass - fiber joint tape. C. Fasteners: Provide industry -standard types of mechanical IT for insulation installation, tested by manufacturer for required pull-out strength where applicable rj and compatible with deck type and roofing products used. Provide either 1-inch-diameter nail heads or 1-3/8-inch- MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07511 - 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 diameter by 30-gage sheet metal caps for nails used to secure base sheets, felts, or insulation boards of roofing system. 2.5. FABRICATION OF SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES A. SMACNA and NRCA Details: Conform work with details shown and with applicable fabrication requirements of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA. Comply with installation details of "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" by NRCA. B. Prefabricate units as indicated or provide standard manufactured units complying with requirements; fabricate from sheet metal indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, from lead -coated copper. C. Provide 4-inch-wide flanges for setting on built-up asphalt roofing system membrane with concealment by composition stripping. D. Fabricate work with flat -lock soldered joints and seams; except where joint movement is necessary, provide 1-inch- deep interlocking hooked flanges filled with mastic sealant. E. Fabricate penetration sleeves with minimum 8-inch-high -- stack, of diameter 1 inch larger than penetrating element. Counterflashing is specified as work of another section of these specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSPECTION OF SUBSTRATE A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive built-up roofing system and associated work and conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Protect other work from spillage of built-up roofing materials, and prevent liquid materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace/restore other work damaged by installation of built-up roofing system work. 07511 - 6 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING i CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Insurance/Code Compliance: Install built-up roofing system for (and test where required to show) compliance with governing regulations and with the following insurance requirements: "Class 1. Factory Mutual requirements for I" or "Noncombustible," including zoned wind resistance as specified by FM. 2. Underwriters Laboratories "Fire Classified" and "Class 60" wind uplift resistance. r t, C. Coordinate the installation of insulation, roofing sheets, flashings, stripping, coatings, and surfacings so that insulation and felts are not exposed to precipitation or exposed overnight. Provide cut offs at end of each day's work, to cover exposed felts and insulation with a course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed with roofing cement. Remove cut offs immediately before resuming work. Glaze -coat installed ply -sheet courses at end of each day's ` work where final surfacing has not been installed. D. Cutoffs: At end of each day's roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and insulation. Provide temporary covering of 2 plies of No. 15 roofing felt set in full moppings of hot bitumen; remove at beginning of next day's work. Glaze -coat areas of completed organic ply sheets which cannot be flood -coated and aggregate -surfaced before end of each day's work. 3.3. INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. General: Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for the handling, installation, and bonding or anchorage of insulation to substrate. B. Prime surface of gypsum deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gallon of primer per 100 sq. ft. and allow primer to dry. C. Secure insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for attachment of specified board type insulation to deck type shown. Fasten insulation over entire area of roofing at spacing as required by FM for Windstorm Resistance Classification I-60. Run long joints for insulation in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slope with end joints staggered between rows. D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains l so completed surface is flush with ring of drain. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07511 - 7 7 CITIBUS 1192-1 3.4. ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION: These specifications are based on the Siplast Roof System: other installations shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. _ A. Beginning at the low point of the roof, lay 1 ply of Paradiene 20 in full coating PA-311 Adhesive. Lap sides and _ ends a minimum of 3 inches. Offset end laps a minimum of 3 feet. B. Beginning again at the low point of the roof, fully adhere 1 ply of Paradiene 30 to the Paradiene 20 surface using Type IV asphalt. Lap sides and ends a minimum of 3 inches. Offset end laps a minimum of 3 feet. Stagger laps between plies.r edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. C. Cant Strips/Tapered Edge Strips: Except as otherwise shown, install preformed 45-deg. insulation cant strips at juncture of roofing system membrane with vertical surface. Provide preformed, tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. D. Set -On Accessories: Where small roof accessories are set on built-up roofing membrane, set metal flanges in a bed of roofing cement and seal penetration of membrane with bead of roofing cement to prevent flow of bitumen from membrane. 3.5. OTHER INSTALLATIONS: A. Roof Drains: Fill clamping ring base with a heavy coating of roofing cement. Set lead flashing sheet in a bed of roofing cement on completed built-up roofing ply sheet courses, with lead sheet clamped in roof drain ring and extended 12 inches onto roofing. Cover lead sheet with composition stripping, with plies extended 4 inches to 6 inches beyond edges of lead sheet. Provide composition — stripping of gravel stop rings (if any). B. Allow for expansion of running metal flashing and edge trim which adjoins roofing. Do not seal or bond membrane or composition flashing and stripping to metal flanges over 3 feet in length. C., Counter-flashings: Counter-flashings, cap flashings, expansion joints, and similar work are to be coordinated with built-up roofing work. of these specifications. D. Roof Accessories: Miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including insulation vents and other devices, and major items of roof accessories (if any) are to be coordinated with built-up roofing system work, 07511 - 8 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING CITIBUS 1192-1 r F I E. The Veral system is preferably applied by torching, which utilizes the closely controlled high -melt asphalt in the sheets themselves. The Irex is first applied to the substrate and is lapped a minimum of 3 inches both side and end. The Veral is then applied to the Irex with 3 inch side and end laps positioned so as not to coincide with those of the Irex. The finished assembly provides a strong, flexible glass - reinforced membrane, completely shielded from the elements. Veral may be applied with Type IV asphalt in lieu of torching, subject to the limitations contained in the "Fastening Schedule". When asphalt is used, laps must be sealed by torching. 3.5. PROTECTION OF ROOFING A. Upon completion of roofing (including associated work), institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing and prepare a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner, describing nature and extent of deterioration or damage found. B. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at time of above inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and in accordance with requirements of specified warranty. END OF SECTION 07511 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07511 - 9 F r� i r CITIBUS 1192-1 1 SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal counter flashing and base flashing (if any). 2. Metal wall flashing. 3. Built-in scuppers. 4. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. B. Integral masonry flashings are specified as masonry work in sections of Division 4. C. Roofing accessories installed integral with roofing membrane are specified in roofing system sections as roofing work. D. Roof accessory units of premanufactured, set -on type are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data, Flashing, Sheet Metal, and Accessories: Manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. 1.4. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes. FFLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 - 1 7 CITIBUS 1192-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS A. Zinc -Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent copper, ASTM A 526 except ASTM A 527 for lock -forming, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; 0.0359-inch thick (20 gage) except as otherwise indicated. B. Copper: ASTM 370; temper HOO except where oho is required for forming, 16 oz. except where shown otherwise. C. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: 1. Solder: For use with steel or copper, provide 50 - 50 tin/lead solder (ASTM B 32), with rosin flux. 2. Bituminous Coating: SSPC Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. 3. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, non-drying, nonmigrating sealant. 4. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal . and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with,requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." 5. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. 6. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with - material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance. 7. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed -cell polyethylene or other soft closed -cell material recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet. 8. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic. 2.2. FABRICATED UNITS A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop -fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and with 07600 - 2 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL - T CITIBUS 1192-1 applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather -resistant performance, with r expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the r A work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat - lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. 0 C. Expansion -Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, , form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards. E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations L� and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 3 07600 - 3 l CITIBUS 1192-1 providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. C. Install elastomeric flashing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where required, provide for movement at joints by forming loops or bellows in width of flashing. Locate cover or filler strips at joints to facilitate complete drainage of water from flashing. Seam adjacent flashing sheets with adhesive, seal and anchor edges in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to curb nailers, at maximum spacing of 6 inches o.c. Fabricate seams at joints between units with minimum 3-inch overlap,, to form a continuous, waterproof system. 3.2. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Protection; Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work _ during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07600 07600 - 4 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL F F r F CITIBUS. 1192-1 SECTION 07700 — ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent and locations of roof accessories is indicated on the drawings and by provisions of this section. B. Types of units specified in this section include the following: 1. Roof hatches. 2. Snow guards. C. Refer to roofing system sections of these specifications for roofing accessories to be built into roofing system (not work of this section). 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data; Roof Accessories: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, rough -in diagrams, details, installation instructions and general product recommendations. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Heat/Smoke Vent Compliance Labels: Provide roof hatch units which have been tested, listed and labeled as follows: 1. Construction/Operation: UL-labeled. 2. Fire Resistance of Lids: UL Class "A". B. Standards: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap- flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. Comply with "NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installation of units. ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: A. Provide manufacturers' standard units, modified as necessary to comply with requirements. Shop fabricate each unit to greatest extent possible. 2.2. MATERIALS, GENERAL: A. Zinc -Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent copper, ASTM A 525, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized. B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi -rigid board of glass fiber of thicknesses indicated. C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water- borne preservatives for above -ground use, complying with AWPB LP-2; not less than 1-1/2" thick. D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. E. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. F. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer, which is compatible with joint surfaces; comply with FS TT-S-00227E, TT-S-00230C, or TT-S-001543A. G. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic. 2.3. PREFABRICATED ROOF HATCHES: A. General: Fabricate units of sizes shown, single -leaf type unless otherwise indicated, for 40 lbs. per sq. ft. external loading and 20 lbs. per sq. ft. internal loading pressure. Frame with 9" high integral -curb double -wall construction with 1-1/2" insulation, cant strips and cap flashing (roofing counter -flashing), with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide double -wall cover (lid) construction with 1" insulation core. Equip units with complete hardware set including safety pole, hold -open devices, interior padlock hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles. Provide gasketing. Fabricate units of following materials: 07700 -2 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES CITIBUS 1192-1 F 1. Materials: Aluminum or zinc -coated steel, or in combination, at Contractor's option. B. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1/4" per ft., fabricate hatch curbs with height tapered to match slope, to result in level installation of tops of units. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide prefabricated roof hatch units by one of the following: 1. Bilco Co.; New Haven, CT 2. Bohem Skylites, Inc.; Burlington, NJ 3. Bristol Fiberlite Industries; Santa Anna, CA 4. Faulkner Plastics, Inc.; Tampa, FL 5. Hillsdale Industries, Inc.; Knoxville, TN. 6. Naturalite, Inc.; Garland, TX 7. Milcor, Inc.; Lima, OH B. O'Keefe's, Inc.; San Francisco, CA 9. Plasteco, Inc.;Houston, TX 2.4. SNOW GUARDS A. Snow guards shall be equal to Model No. 6 copper for tile roofs as manufactured by ZALESKI Snow -Guards and Roofing Specialties, Inc. [(203) 225-1614]. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, and vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing and flashing; as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures. 1. Except as otherwise indicated install roof accessory items in accordance with construction details of "NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual". �^ ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700 - 3 R I CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact with noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation.' C. Flange Seals: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement, to form a seal. D. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of accessory, install to provide adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counter -flashing). Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation. E. Operational Units: Test operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. 3.2. CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. B. Clean and polish plastic skylight units, inside and out, not more than 5 days prior to date of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 07700 07700 -4 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division l Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY: A. Extent of each form and type of joint sealer is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. This Section includes joint sealers for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below. a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Joints between different materials. C. Perimeter joints between materials and at perimeter joints at frames of doors and windows. d. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows. c. Other joints as indicated. C. Sealants for glazing purposes are specified in Division-8 Section "Glass and Glazing." D. Sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum drywall partitions to reduce sound transmission characteristics is specified in Division-9 Section "Gypsum Drywall." 1.3. SYSTEM PERFORMANCES: A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals. JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 1.4. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last 3 years at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this Project. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. C. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealer based on tests conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations within a 24 -month period preceding date of Contractor's submittal of test results to Architect. D. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate -test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: E. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealers, apply elastomeric sealants to the following selected building joints as indicated below for further verification of colors selected from sample submittals and to represent completed work for qualities of appearance, materials, and application: 07900 - 2 JOINT SEALERS - r r CITIBUS 1192-1 1, 1. Joints in field -constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other sections which are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this section. 2. Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed construction. 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers. 2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and r- with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color;of,exposed joint sealers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Ar6hitect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.2. ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS: A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM. C 920 requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3 m i CITIBUS 1192-1 B. One -Part Nonacid -Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,`and complying with the following requirements for Uses and additional joint movement capability: 1. Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. C. One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates; intended for sealing 'joints with nonporous substrates and subject to in- service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes. D. Available Products: Subject to '.compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. One -Part Nonacid -Curing Silicone Sealant: a. "Dow Corning 790"; Dow Corning Corp. b. "Silglaze II 2800"; General Electric Co. C. "Silpruf"; General Electric Co. d. "864"; Pecora Corp. e. "Spectrum l"; Tremco, Inc. f. "Spectrum 2"; Tremco, Inc. 2.3. JOINT SEALANT BACKING: A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: 'Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible, nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below; nonabsorbent to water and gas; and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 1. Either open -cell polyurethane foam or closed -cell polyethylene foam, unless otherwise indicated, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold -applied sealants only. C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to 07900 - 4 JOINT SEALERS CITIBUS 1192-1 water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to -26 deg F (-15 deg C) . Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.4. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer - substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance. C. Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION: A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 3.2. PREPARATION: A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint .substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; old joint sealers; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellants; water; surface dirt; and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above -- cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile; and other nonporous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers. -B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS: A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. 07900 - 6 JOINT SEALERS A- i I CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings ` to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers, compression seals, or back of joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result insealantfailure. 3. Install compressible seals serving as sealant backings to comply with requirements indicated above for joint fillers. C. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. D. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 3.4. CLEANING: A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur. JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 7 I CITIBUS 1192-1 -3.5. PROTECTION: A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07900 ti �07900 - 8 JOINT"SEALERS - r r 9 CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of standard steel doors and frames is indicated and scheduled on drawings. B. Finish hardware is specified elsewhere in Division-8. C. Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry construction is specified in Division 4. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100) and as herein specified. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire -rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide fire -rated door and frame assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows", and have been tested, listed, and labeled in accordance with ASTM E 152 "Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" by a nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 r�, CITIBUS 1192-1 1. Provide schedule of doors and framesusingsame reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract •- drawings. 2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory finished doors., B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery 'for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking. Avoid use of non - vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. c.� PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering steel doors and frames which may be incorporated in the work ,include; but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames, (General): a. Allied Steel Products, Inc. b. Anweld/Div. American Welding & Mfg. Co. C. Ceco Corp. d. Copco Door Co. e. Curries Mfg. Inc. f. Dittco Products, Inc. -� g. Fenestra Corp. h. Kewanee Corp. i. Mesker Industries, Inc. j. Pioneer Bldrs. Products Corp./Div. CORE Industries, Inc. k. Steelcraft/Div. American Standard Co. 1. Trussbilt, Inc. M. Republic Builders Products Corp./Subs. Republic Steel. 08110 - 2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES I r { CITIBUS 1192-1 2.2. MATERIALS: A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon roll, A. pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM r A 568. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial, quality carbon steel, complying .with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A,568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. . D. Supports. and Anchors: Fabricate of not .less than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. E. Inserts, Bolts, and. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot -dip galvanize items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. t� F. Shop Applied Paint: 1 1. Primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air - drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 2.3. FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. Fabricate steel'door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and ;free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory - assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with SDI-100 requirements as follows: 1. Interior and Exterior Doors: SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, minimum 16-gage faces. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold -rolled steel. C. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold -rolled or hot - rolled steel (at fabricator's option). STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 D. Fabricate interior and exterior doors, panels, and frames from paint grip, galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gage inverted steel channels. E. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. F.' Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. y_ 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface''- applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied finish hardware may be done at project site. 2. All frames scheduled to recieve continuous hinges shall be reinforced for the continuous hinge(s). 3. All frames scheduled to receive closers shall be reinforced with 10 gage reinforcement._ --; 4. Locate f inish hardware as indicated on f inal shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and .� Hardware Institute. G. Shop Painting: 1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 2.; Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. 3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished 'surface ready to receive finish paint. 2.4. STANDARD STEEL DOORS: A. 'Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated on drawings or schedules. 2.5. STANDARD STEEL FRAMES: A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise 08110 - 4 STEEL DOORS AND'FRAMES CITIBUS 1192-1 indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 4-gage -paint grip, galvanized, cold -rolled furniture steel. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered corners, welded construction for exterior applications and knocked -down for field assembly at interior applications. B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames and 2 silencers on heads of double -swing frames. C. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. General: Install standard sheet doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated. 1. Except for frames located at in -place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 2. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. 3. At in -place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. 4. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Std. No. 80. 5. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws. STEEL, DOORS AND FRAMES f 08110 - 5 r - CITIBUS 1192-1 C. Door Installation: 1. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100. 3.2. ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Prime Coat Touch -Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic -wrappings from prefinished doors. C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION 08110 08110 - 6 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES r CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum entrance and storefront work: 1. Exterior entrance doors. 2. Vestibule doors matching entrance doors. 3. Transoms. 4 Sidelights 5. Frames for entrances. 6. Storefront -type framing system. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefront,' including entrances specified to be factory glazed, are included in Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing." 2. Lock cylinders are included in Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware." 1.3. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that comply with performance characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock assemblies according to test methods indicated. B. Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum entrance and storefront framing systems' to provide for expansion and contraction of the component materials. Entrance doors shall function normally over the specified temperature range. 1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal surface temperature range of 180 deg F (100 deg C) without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, stress on glass, or other detrimental effects. C. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems that comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated. 1. Wind Loads: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies capable of withstanding wind pressures of 28 psf inward and 28 psf outward acting normal to the plane of the wall. D. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront framing system with an air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area (excluding operable door edges) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward test pressure differential of 1.57 psf. E. Water Penetration: Provide framing. systems with no uncontrolled water penetration (excluding operable door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division l Specification Sections. 1. Product data for each aluminum. entrance and storefront system required, including: a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods. b. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories. C. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. 2. Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including: a. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work. b. Elevations at.1/4-inch scale. C. Detail sections of typical composite members. d. Anchors and reinforcement. e. Hardware mounting heights. f. Provisions for expansion and contraction. g. Glazing details. 08410 - 2 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS � G 'CITIBUS 1192-1 3. Hardware Schedule: Submit complete hardware schedule organized into sets based on hardware specified. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Include item name, name of the manufacturer and complete designations of every item required 'ifor each door opening. 4. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit pairs of samples of each specified color and finish on 12-inch-long sections of extrusions or formed shapes. Where normal color variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of color variations. 5. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples, that show fabrication techniques and workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. 6. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing that aluminum entrance and storefront systems have been tested in accordance with specified test procedures and comply with performance characteristics indicated. 1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installations of aluminum storefront and entrances similar in design andiextent to those required for L_ I the project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service ,performance. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Fabricator Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems fabricated by a firm experienced in producing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project, and that have a record of successful in-service 1 E„ performance. The fabricator shall have sufficient ge production capacity to produce components required without causing delay in progress of the Work. j �Y D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrance and storefront systems from one source and from a single manufacturer. r ALUMINUM. ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS -08410 - 3 f CITIBUS 1192-1 1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging. B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air. 1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant1or permanent damage. 1.7. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work. 1. -Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit. I.B. WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in' materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Structural `failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration. 2. Faulty operation. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: Three (3) years after the date of Substantial Completion, for aluminum doors, frames and operating mechanisms. One (1) year for all other aluminum storefront work. C. The warranty shall not .deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 08410 - 4 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS �- Jr- f r CITIBUS 1192-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering entrance and storefront systems that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amarlite Architectural Products. 2. Kawneer Company, Inc. 3. PPG Industries. 4. Rebco, Inc. 5. United States Aluminum Corp. 2.2. MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion - resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire. 1. Extrusion shall be 6063-T5 alloy and tempra. B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot rolled sheet and strip. C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications. D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw -anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches --thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed -in splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except forapplication of hardware. For -application of hardware, use Phillips :flat -head machine screws that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened. ALUMINUM:=ENTRANCES AND:STOREFRONTS •08410 - 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead -soft stainless steel, or 0.026-inch-thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components. F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high -strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hot -dip galvanized steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123. H. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287. J I. Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2. r 2.3. HARDWARE A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for requirements for hardware items other than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer. B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required; finish to match door. 1. Ball -Bearing Butts:- 5-knuckle, 2-bearings, steel ball bearing butts sized to comply with ANSI A156.1, Grade 1. Provide 2 butts for doors 7 feet 6 inches or less; provide 3 butts for taller and heavier doors. 2. Surface -Mounted Overhead Closers: Modern type with cover, for parallel -arm -type mounting installation. Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for closer size, depending on door size, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. 3. Door Stop: Floor or wall -mounted door stop, as appropriate, with integral rubber bumper; comply with ANSI A156.16, Grade 1. 4. Cylinders are supplied under another Division 8 Section for keying into the building system. 08410 - 6 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND;STOREFRONTS CITIBUS 1192-1 5. Panic Hardware: Rim panic exit devices activated by full - width crash bar equal to Dor-o-matic 1090 Rim Panic. Comply with UL 305. 6. Pull Handles: Aluminum pull handles of style indicated. 7. Push Bars: Manufacturer's standard full -door -width single -bar push bar. 8. Thresholds: , Extruded aluminum threshold of size and design indicated in mill finish, complete with anchors and clips, coordinated with pivots and floor -concealed closers. 9. Automatic Swing Door Operator: Completely self-contained, elect ro-hydraul i c with outswing arm,, surface mounted to the concrete transom bar and shall include push button handicapped switch operator controls equal to Series 1800 HANDICAPPED OPERATOR AND ACTIVATING DEVICES as manufactured by Keane Monroe Corporation. 2.4. COMPONENTS A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront and entrance framing systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include subframes and other reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Shop -fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. Provide storefront frame sections without exposed seams. 1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive resilient elastomeric glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior. 2. Drawings and specifications are based upon the TRIFAB II 451 system as manufactured by the Kawneer Company, Inc. B. Entrance Door Frames:, Provide tubular and channel frame entrance door frame assemblies, as indicated, with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Reinforce as necessary to support required loads. 1. Drawings and specifications are based upon the TRIFAB II 451 system as manufactured by the Kawneer Company, Inc. 2. Removable steel mullion shall be equal to Dor-o-mat i c :RM-70 . C. Stile -and -Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods or j-bolts. fi ALi]MINUM`ENTRANCES AND'STOREFRONTS 08410 - 7 rf r CITIBUS 1192-1 f, 1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide snap -on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for nonremoval. 2. Design: Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors of design indicated. a. Wide stile (5 inches wide). 3. Drawings and specifications are based upon the Series 500 doors .as manufactured by the Kawneer Company, Inc. 2.5. FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable r dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, -hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible "before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes. 2. ,.Do not drill and tap for surface -mounted hardware items .-. until time of installation at project site. 3. Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible. C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed `- welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish. 1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface. r D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance _ and rigidity. 08410 - 8 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES.AND STOREFRONTS -- i CITIBUS 1192-1 E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead. F. Continuity: •Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members. 1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not have an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal. G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. H. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door -edge. 1. Provide EPDM or vinyl -blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for .contact with threshold. 2. At interior doors and other locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal -to -metal contact. 2.6. FINISHES A. General:: Comply with NAAMM "Metal, Finishes Manual" for recommendations -relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA°_ conform to the system established by, the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class I Clear Anodized Finish; AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.7 mil) complying with AAMA 607.1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements :indicated, installation ALUMINUM ENTRANCES ,AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 9 CITIBUS 1192-1 tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the installation. 1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2. INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels. Install components in ' proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to comply with the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length or 1/4 inch in any total length. 2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to r" end in line shall not exceed 1/16 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch. 4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out -of -plane offset of framing at corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication. 2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum. 3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with alkali resistant coating. 4. Paint wood and similar absorptive material in contact with aluminum and exposed to the elements or otherwise subject to wetting, with two coats of aluminum house paint: Seal joints between the materials with sealant. E. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface -mounted hardware items. Comply with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed 'fasteners wherever possible. '68410 - 10 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS CITIBUS 1192-1 F. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets. G. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer. 3.3. ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weathertight closure. 3.4. CLEANING A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. ` 3.5. PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. 3.6. ALUMINUM DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 1 A. END OF SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 11 CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: rA. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Definition: "Finish Hardware" includes items known commercially as finish hardware which are required for swing doors, except special types of unique and non -matching hardware specified in the same section as the door and door frame. B. Extent of finish hardware required is indicated on drawings and in schedules. C. All "Finish Hardware" shall comply fully with applicable "ADA" Standards and Regulations. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. B. Supplier: A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or who employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. C. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire -rated openings in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80 and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL or. FM for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 1 h� 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 1.4. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each item of hardware in accordance with Division-1 section "Submittals". Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finishes. B. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and l related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. 1.5. PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or.package. r B. Packaging of hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with,appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packaged in same.container. , C. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper 1 times to the proper locations (shop or project site) for installation. E. Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation.'' �- 08710 - 2 FINISH HARDWARE CITIBUS 1192-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS AND FABRICATION: A. General: 1. Hand of door: Drawings show direction of swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. r•■ 2. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 1. 3. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 4. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed, except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other r• work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such cases, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. _ 5. Tools and Maintenance Instructions. for .Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of ' finish hardware. 6. All hardware shallbe made in the U.S.A., not just assembled in U.S.A. -; 7. All closers shall be cast-iron. 8. All locks shall have cast levers and wroght trim. Die- cast not acceptable. 2.2. WEATHERSTRIPPING: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,.provide continuous weatherstripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf. Provide type, sizes and profiles shown or scheduled. Provide non -corrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 3 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: 1. Provide bumper -type resilient insert and metal retainer strips, surface -applied unless shown as mortised or semi- mortised, of following metal, finish and resilient bumper material: a. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish; 0.062" minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. b. Closed-cellsponge neoprene insert, conforming to MIL R 613OA Type II, Grade II, 1/4" x 3/411. D. Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms: 1. Provide threshold consisting of contact type resilient insert and metal housing of design and size shown; of following metal, finish, and resilient seal strip. a. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish; 0.062" minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. b. Solid neoprene wiper or sweep seal complying with MIL R 6055, Class II, Grade 40 or: C. Flexible vinyl wiper or sweep seal strip complying with CS 230-60. 2.3. THRESHOLDS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and profile as required to conform to sweep strips above. Units to be 4" x 1/2" aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION - 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. Mount Hardware units at heights indicated in. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and HardwareInstitute, except as •- specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the _ 08710 - 4 FINISH HARDWARE-- - r k.: CITIBUS 1192-1 manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division-9 sections. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space; fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl -rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. 3.2. ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. 3.3. HARDWARE SCHEDULE HEADING #1 Drs. Mk. fl, 2 each pair to have 2 Cylinders 5253A x Us 26D FINISH HARDWARE Corbin 08710 - 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 Balance of hardware by door supplier HEADING #2 Drs.'Mk. #3, 4 each pair to have All hardware by door supplier HEADING #3 Drs. Mk. #5 each door to have - 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us 26D Hager 1 Lockset 747L-L9551 x Us 26D Corbin 1 Kickplate 12 x DW-2 Us 32D BBW 1 Wall stop WC12T x Us 32D BBW 3 Silencers BBW HEADING #4 Drs. Mk. #6 @ Storage & Mechanicl, 9 p each door to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us 26D Hager 1 'Lockset 747L-L9551 x Us 26D Corbin 1 Wall stop WC12T x Us 32D BBW 3 Silencers BBW HEADING #5 - Drs. Mk #6 @ Men 106 & Women 108 each door to have 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 Us 26D Hager 1 Push Plate 47H (16" x 1611) x-Us 26D BBW 1 Pull Plate 47J (16" x 2411) x 2919 - x Us 26D BBW ..r 1 Closer 404 x STB X AL LCN 1 Kickplate 12 x DW-211 x'Us 32D BBW 1 Wall stop WC12T x Us 32D BBW 1 Silencers BBW r HEADING #67 Drs. Mk. #7 each door to have 1 pr. Spring hinges 250 4.5 x 4.5 x Us 26D Hager 0.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5x 4.5 x Us.26D Hager 08710 - 6 FINISH HARDWARE r- CITIBUS 1192-1 1 Lockset 747L-L9557 x Us 26D 1 Deadlock 623 x Us 26D 1 Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us 32D 1 Wall stop WC12T x Us 32D 3 Silencers HEADING _#7 Drs. Mk. #8 Corbin Corbin BBW BBW BBw each door to have 1 Continuous hinge HG-305 x Us 32D Markar 1 Push plate 47H (16" x 1611) x Us 32D BBW 1 Pull plate 47J (16" x 24") x 2919 BBW x Us 32D 1 Closer 4041EDA x STB x Al LCN 1 Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us 32D BBW 1 Wall stop 306TB x Us 26D Quality 3 Silencers BBW HEADING #8 Drs. Mk. 110 each pair to have 2 Continuous hinge HG-305 x Us 32D Markar 2 Cane bolts 23/244 x Us 26D BBW 1 Lockset 747L-L9557 x Us 26D Corbin 1 Deadlock 623 x Us 26D Corbin 2 Closer 4041EDA x STB x AL @ 115 LCN 2 Overhead holder 1550 x Us 26D Corbin 2 Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us 32D @ 115 BBW 2 Wall stop 306TB x Us 26D @ 115 Quality 2 Threshold 170A x DW @ 118 Pemko 1 Overhead drip cap 346A x DW + 4" @ 118 Pemko 2 Sweep 315 x DW @ 118 Pemko 1 set Weateher strip 316 AV x OPG. 2 118 Pemko HEADING #9 Drs. Mk. #11 each door to have 1 Continuous hinge HG-305 x Us 32D Markar 1 Deadlock 623 x Us 26D Corbin 1 Closer 4041EDA x STB x AL LCN 1 Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us 32D BBW 1 Wall stop 306TB x Us 26D Quality 3 Silencers BBW 1 Lockset 747-L-L9557 x Us 26D Corbin END OF SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 7 I CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,. including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUMMARY: A. Extent of glass and glazing work is indicatedondrawings and schedules. B. Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for: 1. Window units, not indicated as "preglazed". 2. Storefront construction. 3. Entrances and other doors, not indicated as'"preglazed". 4. Mounted Glass in doors at display case. 1.3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or 4r gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work. 1. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F (67 deg. C) and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass framing members of 180 deg. F (100 deg. C) , 2. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal due to other causes than breakage which results in intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coating, if any, resulting from seal failure, and any other visual evidence of seal failure or performance. GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 1 x, CITIBUS 1192-1 1.4. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions. B. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, 12" square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear single pane units, and 12" long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative of adjoining framing system in color. C. A. B. Certificate: Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements. 1. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Submit statement from sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and interpreting test results relative to material performance, including recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. QUALITY ASSURANCE: Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. 1.. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 08800 - 2 GLASS AND..GLAZING M.- 1-1 i CITIBUS 1192-1 r t; C. Fire Resistance Rated Wire Glass: Provide wire glass products that are identical to those tested per ASTM E 163 (UL 9) and are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component 'pane of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing organization indicated below: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI). E. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from, a single source for each type and class required. 1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes. 1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, avoid hermetic seal ruptures by complying with insulating glass fabricator's recommendations for venting and sealing. 1.7. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes. 1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 deg. F (4.4 deg. C). GLASS AND GLAZING t 08800 - 3 r CITIBUS 1192-1 WARRANTY: General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's Special Project Warranty on Insulating Glass: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for those insulating glass units developing manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are defined as failure or hermetic seal of air space (beyond that due to glass breakage) as evidenced by intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coatings, if any, and other visual indications of seal failure or performance;, provided the manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting and maintaining units have been complied with during the warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS. 2.1. MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Manufacturers of Clear and Tinted Float Glass: 'a. AFG Industries, Inc. b. Ford Glass Division. c. Guardian Industries Corp. d. LOF Glass, Inc. e. PPG Industries, Inc. 2 Manufacturers of Wire Glass a. AFG Industries, Inc. b. Guardian Industries Corp. 3. Manufacturers of Insulating Glass a. AFG Industries, Inc. b. Ford Glass Division. c. Guardian Industries Corp. d. PPG Industries, Inc. 08800 - 4 -GLASS ;AND GLAZING r- r CITIBUS 1192-1 2.2. GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C 1036jrequirements, including those indicated by reference to type;, class, quality,, and, if applicable, form, finish, mesh and pattern. B. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated. 2.3. PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS: A. Clear Float Glass Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select); fully tempered. B. Tinted Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3 (glazing select), fully tempered and as follows: 1. Gray: Manufacturer's standard tint, with visible light transmittance of 41-43 percent and shading coefficient of 0.67- 0.69 percent for 1/4" thick glass. C. Wired Glass: Type Il (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (translucent), Quality q8 (glazing); complying with ANSI Z97.1; 1/4" thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below: 1. Polished Wire, Glass Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), Mesh m2 (square). 2.4. HEAT -TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS: A. Manufacturing Process: Manufacture heat -treated glass as follows: 1. By horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll wave distortion parallel with bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Ceramic -Coated Heat -Treated Spandrel Glass: Condition B (spandrel --glass, one surface ceramic coated), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select)'',, with ceramic coating applied to second surface and complying with the following requirements: 1. Kind HS (heat strengthened). GLASS AND GLAZING i 08800 - 5 t CITIBUS 1192-1 2.5. A. 2. Color: As selected' by Architect 1 from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Adhered Backing: Laminate manufacturer's standard adhered scrim backing to ceramic -coated surface; provide backed units -identical to materials which, while possibly developing cracks and fissures, show no shear nor develop any openings large enough for the unobstructed penetration of a 3" diameter sphere. SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS: General: Provide preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space and complying_ with ASTM E 774 for performance classification indicated as well as with other requirements specified for glass characteristics, air space, sealing system, sealant, spacer material, corner design and desiccant. 1. For properties of individual glass panes making up units, refer to product requirements specified elsewhere in this section applicable to types, classes, kinds and conditions of glass products indicated. 2. Provide 'heat -treated panes of kind and at locations indicated or, if not indicated, provide heat -strengthened panes where recommended by manufacturer for application indicated and tempered where indicated or where safety glass is designated or required. 3. Performance characteristics designated for coated insulating glass are nominal values based on manufacturer's. published test data for units with 1/4" thick panes of glass and 1/2" thick air space. P_ a. U-values indicated are expressed in the number of Btu's per hour per sq. ft. per degree F difference. -w 4. Performance Classification per ASTM E 774: Class A. a. Thickness of Each Pane: 1/4". b. Air Space Thickness: 1/2". c. Sealing System:: Manufacturer's standard. d.Spacer Material: Manufacturer's.standard metal. 5. Desiccant: Manufacturer's standard; either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both. 6. Corner Constructions Manufacturer's standard corner construction. 08800 6 .GLASS SAND :GLAZING CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Uncoated -Insulating Glass Units: Manufacturer's standard units complying with the following requirements: 1. Exterior Pane: Tinted float glass or clear float glass as indicated on the Drawings. a. Tint: Gray b. Kind FT (fully tempered) 2. Interior Pane of Glass: Clear float glass. a. Kind FT (fully tempered). 3. Performance Characteristics: Visible light transmittance of 38-41 percent, summer daytime U-value of 0.56-0.58, winter nighttime U-value of 0.48-0.49,,shading coefficient of 0.52-0.62 and outdoor reflectance of 7-8 percent. 2.6. ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TAPES: A. General: Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing_ sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealants and tapes which have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. 3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. 4. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard solvent -free butyl-polyisobutylene formulation with a solids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA A 804.1; in extruded tape form; non -staining and non -migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side; with or without continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape and glass for application indicated. GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 7 °-CITIBUS 1192-1 C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, glazing sealants which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape Without Spacer Rod: a. "Chem -Tape 40"; Bostik Construction Products Div. b. "Extru-Seal"; Pecora Corp. C. "PTI 303" Glazing Tape; Protective Treatments, Inc. d. "Tremco 440 Tape"; Tremco Inc. 2.7. MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS: A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. 'B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers:. Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness. D. Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers for application indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene,EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (si.de-walking) of glass. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION: A. Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier's written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 08800 - 8 GLASS AND.GLAZING .- 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 3.20 PREPARATION: A. Pre -Installation Meeting: At Contractor's direction, Glazier, sealant and gasket manufacturers' technical representatives, glass framing erector and other trades whose work affects glass and glazing shall meet at project site to review procedures and time schedule proposed for glazing and coordination with other work. B. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. 3.3. GLAZING, GENERAL: A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards. B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners.. -Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift.glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at.top of opening. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance. D. Apply primers- to joint surfaces where required for adhesion 11 of sealants, as determined by proconstruction sealant - substrate testing. ti 3.4. GLAZING: A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of, glass width from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6" from corner, unless GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 9 CITIBUS 1192-1 otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use. B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct ,size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height)-,- except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer. D. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. E. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. F. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial. "wash" away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3.5. PROTECTION AND CLEANING: A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed streamers ,attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass _. manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build- up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer. 08800 - 10 1GLASS AND GLAZING CITIBUS 1192-1 D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 11 r CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY: A. Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required is indicated on Drawings. B. This Section includes the following types of gypsum board construction: 1. Steel framing members to receive gypsum board. 2. Gypsum board screw -attached to steel framing and furring members. C. Wood framing and furring are specified in the following Division 6 sections: 1. "Rough Carpentry. 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete. C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials form drying too rapidly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Bostwick Steel Framing Co. b. Dale Industries, Inc. C. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. d. Incor, Inc. e. Marino Industries Corp. f. United States Gypsum Co. 09250 - 2 GYPSUM -DRYWALL CITIBUS 1192-1 2. Gypsum Boards and Related Products: ra. Centex American Gypsum Co. ` b. Domtar Gypsum Co. r� C. Georgia-Pacific Corp. i d. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. ( e. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2. STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS: A. General: Drywall framing shall be in accordance with. USG Folder SA-923 and as follows 1. Al studs over 14 feet high but less than 15 feet, 7 inches shall be 20 gauge. 2. All diagonal bracing over 8 feet long shall be 20 gauge. 3. All horizontal bracing over 4 feet long shall be 20 gauge. B. All connections of studs, bracing, furring, etc. shall be with 5/8" S-12 pan head screws with a minimum of four screws per connection. C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust - inhibitive paint. E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust - inhibitive paint. F. Angle -Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed from 0.0635 inch thick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, Coating Designation G90, with bolted connections and 5/16 inch diameter bolts. G. Channels: Cold -rolled steel, 0.0598 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 inch wide flanges, protected with rust -inhibitive paint, and as follows: 1. Carrying Channels: 2 inches deep, 590 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated. 2.. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep, 475 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated. fr 2 GYPSUM -DRYWALL 09250 - 3 r CITIBUS 1192-1 2.3. STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS: A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645,. with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Spacing: 16 inches on center, unless shown otherwise. B. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat -shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1. Depth: 7/8 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications indicated. 2.4. TRIM ACCESSORIES: A. Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. -Material: Formed metal, plastic or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the ., following requirement: a. Sheet steel zinc -coated by hot -dip process. 2 Edge trim shapes indicated" below by reference to designations of Fig. l in ASTM C 1047: a. "LC" Bead, unless otherwise indicated. 3. One -Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM.0 1047, withslotopening. covered with removable strip. 2.5. GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS:. A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum 09250 - 4 GYPSUM DRYWALL F CITIBUS 1192-1 board and joint treatment materials for the application r- indicated ` B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use pressure sensitive or staple -attached open -weave glass fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. x.. C. Setting -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged, job -mixed, t chemical -hardening powder products formulated for uses L. indicated. 1. Where setting -type joint compounds are indicated for use as taping and topping compounds, use formulation for each which develops greatest bond strength and crack resistance and is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. D. Drying -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready -Mix Formulation: Factory -premixed product. 2. Job -Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for R first coat over fasteners and flanges of corner beads and j� edge trim. 4. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 5. All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping and topping compound. 2.6. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board. rµ B. Laminating Adhesive: Special. adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum boards. C. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound of type recommended.for spot grouting hollow metal ;door frames. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type r GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 5 f� CITIBUS 1192-1 described below with thermosetting resins to. comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing); and as follows: 1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag. E. Decorative laminate wall panel systems shall be equal to Panel Specialists, Inc. Wall _panel system 310 with a fine matte Texture, color to be selected by .Architect. Provide all mouldings and trim as required. 2.7. TEXTURE FINISH MATERIALS: A. Primer Of type recommended by manufacturer of texture finish. B. Texture Coat: Manufacturer's standard product for stipple finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION: A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal frames, cast -in -anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2. INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL: A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by'•United States Gypsum Co. 09250 - 6 GYPSUM DRYWALL I- CITIBUS 1192-1 1 C. Isolate' steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement, at 7 locations indicated below. 1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at ceiling perimeters or penetration of structural elements. 2. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure. D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members; independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members or as indicated. 3.3. INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS: A. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to cast -in concrete inserts or other anchorage devices or fasteners as required. 1. Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs. 2. Do not attach hangers -to metal roof deck. 3. Do not attach hangers to underside of concrete slabs with powder -actuated fasteners. B. Do not connector suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. C. Keep hangers and braces 2 inches clear of ducts, pipes and conduits. D. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard. 3.4. INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS: A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall. t` B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where GYPSUM DRYWALL L 09250 - 7 CITIBUS 1192-1 partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and ,openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. C. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard. In general spacing shall not exceed 16 inches on center. E. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219 and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install trunner: track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. ,.. 3.5. APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL: A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed after board has been installed. _ C. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board. D. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints, and which avoids end �.,. joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches. E. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the _ number of end -butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible. At high walls,install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards.. Do not force into place. 09250 - 8 GYPSUM DRYWALL I 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in �-- horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position 4 boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends against mill -cut or field -cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges t or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. H. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that 'leading edge or end of each board is attached to'open,(unsupported) edge of �., stud flange first. I. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts. J. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip just before inserting board into frame. K. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. L. Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and trim edge: with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. M. Where sound -rated drywall construction is indicated, seal construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off sound -flanking paths around or through construction, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings. N. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.6. METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION: A. Single -Layer, Application: 'Install .,gypsum wallboard as follows: 1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible. fir-• GYPSUM DRYWALL I€ -09250 - 9 CITIBUS 1192-1 2. On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. 3. On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally (perpendicular to framing); use maximum length sheets possibleto minimize end joints. 4. On Z-furring members apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. B. Double -Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base layer and gypsum wallboard for face layer. 1. On partitions/walls apply base layer and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated, with joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 10 inches with base layer joints. C. Direct -Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum board is indicated to be directly adheredto a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum board until fastening. adhesive has set. 3.7. INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES: A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install corner beads at external corners. C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where "U" bead (semi -finishing type) is indicated. 3.8. FINISHING OF DRYWALL: A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both _ directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. 09250 - 10 GYPSUM DRYWALL CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting -type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated. D. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last coat: 3.9. APPLICATION OF TEXTURE FINISH: A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and prime drywall and other surfaces in strict accordance with texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer to all surfaces to achieve texture finish. B. Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to drywall and other surfaces indicated to receive finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce a uniform texture matching Architect's sample without starved spots or other evidence of thin application, and free of application patterns. C. Remove any texture droppings or overspray from door frames, windows and other adjoining construction. 3.10. PROTECTION: A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 11 F CITIBUS 1192-1 d a; SECTION 09300 - TILE r PART 1 - GENERAL I.I. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General i and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Unglazed Quarry tile. 2. Stone thresholds at all Toilet room entrance doors. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealersn for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. t 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Shop drawings indicating the patterns and locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. 1. Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by measuring, record measurements on shop drawings, and coordinate them with tile joint locations, in construction with Architect D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of _actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tile TILE 09300 - 1 r CITIBUS 1192-1 indicated. Include samples of grout and accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared on samples of size and construction indicated, products involve color and texture variations, in sets showing full range of variations expected. 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 inches _. square, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.' F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Single -Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. 00300 - 2 TILE -- C CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. C. Handle tile with temporary Protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite these precautions coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. r { 1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS r^ A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and f.. after installation to comply with referenced standards and d manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile r work from carbon dioxide buildup. �+ C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. 1.7. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Unglazed Quarry Tile: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Buchtal Corp. USA. c. Dal -Tile Corp. .TILE 09300 - 3 t CITIBUS 1192-1 d. Metropolitan Ceramics Div.; Metropolitan Industries e. Mid -State Tile Co. f. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc. g. Summitville Tiles, Inca h. Texeramics Inc. i. Universal Ceramics, Inc. 2. Latex -Emulsion -Based Latex -Portland Cement Mortars: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Boiardi Products Corp. c. Bostik Construction Products Div. d. Custom Building Products e. C-Cure Chemical Co. f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. g. L & M Mfg. Inc. h. Laticrete International Inca i. Mapei Corp. J. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc 1. Syracuse Adhesives Co. 3. Acrylic Emulsions for Latex -Portland -Cement Grouts: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. - b. Boiardi Products Corp. c. Bostik Construction Products Div. d. Custom Building Products e. C-Cure Chemical Co. f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. g. L & M Mfg. Inc. h." Laticrete International. Inc. i. Mapei Corp. J. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 1. Syracuse Adhesives Co. 4. Chemical -Resistant, Water -Cleanable Tile Grouting Epoxies: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. c. Bostik Construction Products Div. d. C-Cure Chemical Co. e. L & M Mfg. Inc. f. Laticrete International Inc. g. Mapei Corp. h. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. i. Summitville Tiles,.Inc. j. Syracuse Adhesives Co. '69300 - 4 TILE r- CITIBUS 1192-1 r 5. Silicone Rubber Grouts: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Laticrete International Inc. 6. Manufacturers of Chemical -Resistant Joint Sealants: a. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals Inc. b. Pennwalt Corp. 2.2. PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tiler Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated. 1. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI Standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, .and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics,. provide -specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for products of type indicated. 2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. 2.3. TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Quarry Tile: Provide square -edged flat tile complying with the following requirements: 1. Wearing Surface: Abrasive aggregate embedded in wearing surface. 2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 6 inches by 6 inches. 3. Face: Plain., TILE 09300 - 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 2.4. SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composition as follows: 1. Latex additive (water emulsion) of type described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, combined at job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex additive manufacturer. a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. 2 ' Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland cement' graded aggregate, and the following dry polymer additive in the form of a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site. a. Dry Polymer Additive: Manufacturer's standard. B. Organic Adhesive: Ansi A136.1, Type I. 2.5. GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A116.6, color as indicated, composition as follows: 1' Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, added at job site with dry grout mixture, with type of latex and dry grout mix as follows: a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. b.Dry Grout Mixture: Dry -set grout specified or supplied by latex additive manufacturer. Use latex additive without retarder with dry -set grout. 1) Application: Use commercial portland cement grout combined with latex additive for grouting joints in floor tile unless otherwise indicated. 2.6. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A., Metal Edge Strips: - Zinc alloy or stainless steel terrazzo strips, 1/8-inch wide at top edge with integral provision for 09300 - 6 TILE CITIBUS 1192-1 r anchorage to mortar bed or substrate unless otherwise indicated. B. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout, is compatible with tile and mortar/grout products, and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined, tasteless, odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 deg F (49 deg C) to 140 deg F (60 deg C) per ASTM D 87. 2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile. C. Stone thresholds at Toilet room entrance door shall be marble in color(s) as selected by the Architect in the profile as shown in the Drawings with a sandblast finish. 2.7. MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT. A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water,. or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before.installing tile. TILE .09300 - 7 CITIBUS-1192-1 B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2. PREPARATION A. Blending for tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken. from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3. INSTALLATION, .GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under _ "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections, and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of the without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints.- Fit tide closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid ..pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out the work and center _ tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall _area. .Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown.. A9300 - 8 TILE Li CITIBUS 1192-1 F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant - filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after r installation of tiles. 3.4. FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS: A. Quarry Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting -bed method, TCA installation method related to type of subfloor construction, and grout type: 1. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1. r a. Bond Coat: Portland cement paste or dust coat on plastic bed or the following thin -set mortar on cured bed, ANSI A108.5, at Contractor's option: 1) Latex-portland cement mortar. b. Concrete Subfloor, Interior: TCA F112 (bonded). c. Grout: Latex-portland cement. B. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at all toilet doors, set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish. 3.5. CLEANING AND PROTECTION F A. TILE Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. 09300 - 9 r fi' CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken,.unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that the is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage,:and wear. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at "- ,least 7 days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 69300 09300 - 10 TILE CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. SUMMARY: A. Extent of each type of acoustical ceiling is shown and scheduled on drawings. B. Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the following: 1. Acoustical panel ceilings,. exposed suspension. 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required. B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following: 1. 6" square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern and color. C. Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturers of acoustical ceiling units and suspension systems attesting that their products comply with specification requirements. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other work supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system components (if any), and partition system (if any). ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes. B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. - C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. - 1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is ... complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.7. EXTRA MATERIALS: A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 5.0% of -amount installed. 2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed component equal to 5.0% of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong. World Industries, Inc._ 2. USG Interiors, Inc. 09510 - 2 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS - I rl 2.2. ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS CITIBUS 1192-1 A. Type "A'. Ceilings (#41): 1. Equal to USG Orion 210 vinyl faced, Item #62111. 2. Edge - Square 3. Size - 2' x 4' x 1/2" 4. Pattern - Random weave textured (Pattern 210) 5. Color - White 6. Suspension grid.- Equal to USG Donn DX 15/16" grid. B. Type "B" Ceilings (#42) 1. Equal to USG Eclipse, Item 76075 2. Edge - ILT 3. Size - 2' x 2' x 3/411 4. Pattern —Fine textured 5. Color - White - 6. Suspension Grid - Equal to USG Donn Centricitee 9/16" grid C. Type "C" Ceilings (43) 1. Equal to USG Auratone Rock Face Panels 56335 2. Edge - Square 3. Size - 2' x 4' x 5/8" 4. Pattern - Rock Face 5. Color - White 6. Suspension Grid - Equal to USG Donn DX 15/16" grid 2.3. METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL: A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal -suspension systems: of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory - applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. 1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: fastener system of type suitable .for application indicated, .fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attachment of hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to ►� ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS F �a 09510 - 3 r 6' C' CITIBUS 1192-1 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing laboratory. D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class l zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct -Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch diameter (12 gage). E. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type edge detail and suspension system indicated. 2.4. NON -FIRE -RESISTANCE -RATED DIRECT -HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS: A. Narrow -Face Capped Double -Web Steel Suspension System equal to USG DONN CENTRICITEE: Main and cross -runners roll -formed from prepainted or electrolytic zinc -coated cold -rolled steel sheet, with prefinished 9/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: 1. Face Design: Flush capped faces without slot or reveal, with device built into runners to center panels in openings. 2. Structural Classification: Intermediate -Duty System 3. Cap Material and Finish: Steel sheet painted to match color of acoustical unit. 4. Use at Type B ceilings. B. Wide -Face Capped Double -Web Steel Suspension System equal to USG DONN DX: Main and cross -runners roll - formed from prepainted or electrolytic zinc -coated cold rolled steel sheet, with prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -Duty System. 2. End Condition of Cross -Runners: Override (stepped) type• 3. Cross -Runners: Same height as main runner. 4. Cap Material and-FInish: Steel sheet with painted finish to match color of acoustical unit. Use at Type A & C. 09510 - 4 ACOUSTICAL"CEILINGS CITIBUS 1192-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified int this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2. PREPARATION: A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less -than -half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans wherever possible. �^ Notify Architect when lay -out of reflected ceiling plan cannot be obtained as indicated before proceeding with work. 3.3. INSTALLATION: A. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation standard referenced below, per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook". 1. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C 636. B. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally -patterned units in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans. C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6" from each end and spaced 4'- 0" along each carrying channel or direct -hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". 1. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye -screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. 2. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 5 CITIBUS 1192-1 by bracing, countersplaying or other equally effective means. D. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations where necessary to _ conceal edges of acoustical units. 1. Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant, concealed on back of vertical leg before installing moldings. 2. Screw -attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension ` system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. — 1. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, and in areas where required by governing regulations or for fire - resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required. 3.4. CLEANING: A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09510 09510 - 6 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS r i CITIBUS 1192-1 6 SECTION 09 50.- RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings and in schedules. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Provide, each type of resilient' flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds. B. Installer's Qualifications: Engage Installer who is certified in writing by resilient flooring manufacturer as qualified for installation of sheet vinyl employing heat welded seams. 1.4. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of resilient flooring and accessory. B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's standard color charts in form of actual sections of resilient flooring, including accessories, showing full range of colors and patterns available, for each type of resilient flooring required. C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. 7 1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 1 7 CITIBUS 1192-1 than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) in areas where work is completed. B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by resilient flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturers of Vinyl Composition Tile: a. Amtico Flooring Div., American Biltrite Inc. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc. d. Kentile Floors, Inc. e. Tarkett Inc. 2. Manufacturers of Vinyl Wall Base: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc. c. Flexco Div Textile.Rubber Co. d. Johnson Rubber Co. Inc. e. Kentile Floors, Inc. f Mercer Plastics Co., Inc. g. Vinyl Plastics Inc. 2.2. RESILIENT FLOORING COLORS AND PATTERNS: A. Provide colors and patterns as indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. 09650 2 RESILIENT FLOORING f CITIBUS 1192-1 L 2.3. TILE FLOORING: A. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312,-Type IV; 12" x 12" unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Composition 1 - asbestos -free. 2. Gage: 1/80. 2.4. ACCESSORIES: A. Vinyl Wall Base: Provide vinyl base complying with FS SSW- 40, Type II, with matching end stops and preformed or molded corner units, 4 inches high, from standard colors. Use premolded corners. Units to be cove, set -on type. B. Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8" thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected by Architect from standard colors available; not less than 1" wide. C. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. D. Concrete Slab Primer: Non -staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. E.—Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSPECTION: A. Require Installer to inspect subfloor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory. A satisfactory subfloor surface is defined as one that is smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, coatings preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or appearance. B. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are sufficiently.cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence of curing compounds. C . Do not allow resilient flooring work to proceed unt i l subfloor surfaces are satisfactory. RESILIENT FLOORING 1: 09650 - 3 } CITIBUS 1192-1 3.2. PREPARATION: A. Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows: 1. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks, holes and depressions in subfloors. 2. Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including curing compounds incompatible with resilient flooring adhesives, paint, oils, waxes and sealers. B. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor. C. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions.` 3.3. INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Install resilient flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Extend resilient flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings. B. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, outlets and permanent columns, walls and partitions. C. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non -permanent marking device. D. Install resilient flooring on covers for telephone and electrical. ducts, and other such items occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed in these covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. E. Tightly cement resilient flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of„adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. — Hand roll resilient flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion. 09650 - 4 RESILIENT -FLOORING CITIBUS 1192-1 F F F F 3.4. INSTALLATION OF TILE FLOORS: A. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 the at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. B. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not acceptable. 1. Lay tile with grain running in one direction. C. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions. 3.5. INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES: A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. 1. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. B. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Installedging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. 3.6. CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring: 1. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer has elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well -sealed in adhesive. 3. Damp -mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 5 r CITIBUS 1192-1 4. Remove any excess adhesive or other :surface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner recommended by resilient — flooring manufacturers. B. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with resilient flooring manufacturer's directions. 1. Apply protective floor polish to resilient flooring surfaces free from soil, excess adhesive or surface blemishes. Use commercially available metal cross -linked acrylic product acceptable to resilient flooring manufacturer. — 2. Protect resilient flooring against damage from rolling loads for initial period following installation by covering with plywood or hardboard. Use dollies to move stationary equipment or furnishings across floors. -' 3. Cover resilient flooring with:undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for substantial completion. C. Clean resilient flooring prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish "date of substantial completion in each area of project. Clean resilient flooring by method=recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. — 1.. Strip protective floor polish, which was applied after completion of installation, prior to cleaning. — 3.7. EXTRA STOCK: A.: Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Owner. Furnish maintenance materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed . and enclosed in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels. 1.. Tile Flooring: Furnish not less than one box for each 50 — boxes or fraction thereof, for each type, color, pattern and size installed. 09650 - 6 1 1RESILIENT FLOORING CITIBUS 1192-1 i, SECTION 09900 —PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL I.I. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except .where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory -finished components: a. Metal toilet enclosures. b. Acoustic materials. 2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Utility tunnels. d. Pipe spaces. e. Duct shafts. PAINTING 09900 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper. _ e. Bronze. f. Brass. 4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c: Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code -required labels or equipment -- name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. — 3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application instructions for each material proposed for use. 1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. B. Samples for initial color selection in the form of _ manufacturer's color charts. 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 09900 - 2 "PAINTING CITIBUS 1192-1 " C. Samples, for verification purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples !� for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat ffl1% paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on QA characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified. C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paintmaterial of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers. 1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic 'classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Thinning instructions. 5. Application instructions. 5. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F clean (7 deg C): Maintain containers used in storage in condition, free of foreign materials and residue. a PAINTING 09900 - 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 1. Protect from f reezing. . Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take r-- necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.6. JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to�be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces �. and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: 1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe). - 2. The Glidden Company (Glidden). 3. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 4. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh). r_ 5. Pratt and Lambert (P & L) 6. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).. 2.2. MASONRY BLOCK FILLER A. Use on all exposed CMU except acoustical block. _ '.09900 - 4 PAINTING CITIBUS 1192-1 B. High -Performance Latex Block Filler: Heavy-duty latex block fillers used for filling open textured interior and exterior ' concrete masonry block before application of top coats: 1. Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 2. Glidden: 5317 Ultra -Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 3. Moore: Moorcraft Block Filler #145. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler. 5. P & L: Pro -Hide Plus Block Filler. k 6. S-W: Heavy -Duty Block Filler B42W46. 2.3. PRIMERS A. Interior Flat Latex -Based Paint: Flat latex paint used as a primer over concrete and masonry under alkyd flat and semigloss enamel: 1. Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2. Glidden: 5300 Ultra -Hide Flat Wall Paint. 3. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. ,4. Pittsburgh: 80 Line Wallhide-Flat Latex Paint. 5. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex.Flat B30W200. B. Latex -Based Interior White Primer: Latex -based primer coating used on interior gypsum drywall under a flat latex paint or an alkyd semigloss enamel. i. 1. Devoe: 50801 Wonder -Tones Latex Primer and 2. Glidden: Sealer. 5019 PVA Primer. 3. Moore., Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-2 Quick -Dry Latex Primer Sealer. 5. P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001. 6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall'Primer B28W200. C. Synthetic, Rust -Inhibiting Primer: Quick -drying, rust - inhibiting primer for priming ferrous metal on the exterior l; under full -gloss and flat alkyd enamel and on the interior under flat latex paint or odorless alkyd semigloss or alkyd gloss enamels: 1. Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red. 2. Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast -Dry Metal Primer. 3. Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust -Inhibitive Paint #163. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer. 5. P & L: Effecto Rust -Inhibiting Primer. PAINTING 09900 - 5 r CITIBUS 1192-1 6. S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50Wl. D. Galvanized Metal Primer: Primer used to prime interior and exterior zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. Devoe: 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer. 2. Glidden: 5229 Glid-Guard All -Purpose Metal Primer. 3. Moore: Ironclad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer. 5. S-W: Galvite B50W3. 2.4. UNDERCOAT MATERIALS A. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel for use on the interior as an undercoat over a primer on concrete or masonry under an odorless semigloss enamel: 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd,Enamel Undercoat. 2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. 3. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 4. Pittsburgh: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 5. P & L: E6 Enamel Undercoater. 6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. r_ 2.5. EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather -resistant, air -drying, high gloss enamel for use on the exterior over prime -coated wood: 1. Devoe 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 2. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 3., Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 4. Pittsburgh 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 5. P & L: Effecto'Enamel. 6. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. B. Alkyd Gloss Enamel; Weather -resistant high -gloss enamel for use over primed ferrous metal surfaces: i 1. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 2. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. _ 3. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 4. 'Pittsburgh: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 09900 - 6 PAINTING '- CITIBUS 1192-1 5. P & L: Effecto Enamel. 6. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. C. Lusterless Alkyd Enamel: Alkyd base flat enamel for use over prime -coated ferrous metal: 1. Devoe: 56400 De-Vo-Ko Lo-Lustre Alkyd H.P. 2. Moore: Moore's PentaFlex Flat House Paint #114. 3. Pittsburgh: 50-52 Snolite Exterior Alkyd Flat House Paint. 4. S-W: Pro -Mar, Alkyd Flat Exterior Finish B38 Series. D. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather -resistant high -gloss enamel for use over primed, zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces and aluminum: 1. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 2. Glidden: 4500-Line Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 3. Moore:. Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 4. Pittsburgh: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 5. P & L: Effecto Enamel. 6. S-W: Metalastic II Enamel B-53 Series. 2.6. INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Low -odor, semigloss, alkyd enamel for use over a primer and undercoat on concrete, masonry (including concrete masonry block), plaster, wood, and hardboard and both ferrous and zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces and over a primer on gypsum drywall: 1. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 3. Moore: Moore's.Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 4. Pittsburgh: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 5. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 6. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PAINTING 09900 - 7 CTTIHUS 1192-1 1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3.2.. PREPARATION A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface - applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. -� Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. H. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish -coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral -fiber -reinforced cement _ panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast -cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before r application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.- v 09900 - 8 PAINTING CITIBUS 1192-1 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign r- substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as - required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off'. a. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately l upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. I b. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvani zed f errous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of .the Steel Structures Painting Council. a. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that i have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non - petroleum -based solvents so that the surface is free of 4 oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by .. mechanical methods. 1 3.3. APPLICATION r' A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to -formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules." 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. - .The . number of • coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by* the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding.is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. PAINTING Q9900 - 9 ; CITIBUS 1192-1 4. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, .receive.a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field- finished casework to match exterior. 10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 12. Omit primer on metal.surf aces that have.been shop -primed and touch up painted. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does, not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreadingrate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Block Fillers: Apply block .fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. 09900 - 10 PAINTING C I I I I CITIBUS 1192-1 v F. Prime Coats:Before application of finish coats,. apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of .suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn . through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. G. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even {' and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface ,.� imperfections. H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush .marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.4. CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5. PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly.painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. PAINTING 09900 - 11 V. CITIBUS 1192-1 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6. EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE r, A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated. B. Concrete: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Acrylic Finish: Two coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. First and Second Coats: Exterior acrylic emulsion. 1. Devoe: 15XX Wonder -Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint. 2. Fuller: 262-XX 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat -- Finish. 3. Glidden: 3525 Spred Glide -On. 4. Moore: Moore's Flat Exterior Latex Masonry �.. ' & House Paint #105. 5. PPG: 72 Line Sun Proof Acrylic Latex House _ Paint #105. 6. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat House Paint. 7. S-W: A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A-6 Series. C. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop -primed items. 1. Full -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Synthetic rust -inhibiting primer. 1. Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red. 2. Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. 3. Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast -Dry ;- Metal Primer. 4. Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint #163. 5. PPG: 6-208 Red -Inhibitive Metal Primer. 6. P & L:- Effecto Rust Inhibiting Primer. 7. S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1. 4 b. First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel. 1. Devoe: 70XX MirrolacInter ior/Exterior Alkyd - r.. Urethane Gloss Enamel. 09900 - 12 .:PAINTING -- f CITIBUS 1192-1 2. Fuller: 312-XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty Enamel. 3. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 4. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 5. PPG: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 6. P & L: Effecto Enamel. 7. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. D. Zinc -Coated Metal: 1. High -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer. 1. Devoe: 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer. 2. Fuller: 621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer. 3. Glidden: 5229 Glid Guard All Purpose Metal Primer. 4. Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155. 5. PPG: 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer. 6. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 7. S-W: Galvite B50W3 b. First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel. 1. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd - Urethane Gloss Enamel. 2. Fuller: 312-XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty Enamel. 3. Glidden: 4500-Line Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 4. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 5. PPG: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 6. P & L: Effecto Enamel. 7. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. 3.7. INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. E. Concrete: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Acryllic Finish: Two Coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. r* PAINTING 09900 - 13 CITIBUS 1192-1 r a. First and Second Coats: Exterior Acrylic emulsion. 1. Devoe: 15xx Wonder -Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint. 2. Fuller: 262-XX 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat Finish. 3. Glidden: 3525 Spred Glide -On. 4. Moore: Moore's Flat Exterior Latex Masonry & House Paint #105. 5. PPG: 72 Line Sun -Proof Acrylic Latex House Paint. 6. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat House Paint. 7. S-W: A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A-6 Series. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Semigloss, Alkyd, Enamel Finish: Two coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat. a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler. 1. Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil 'Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 2. Fuller: 280-00 Interior / Exterior Latex Block Filler. 3. Glidden: 5317 Ultra -Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 4. Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler # 173. 5. PPG: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler. 6. P & L: Pro -Hide Plus Block Filler. 7. S-W: Heavy -Duty Block Filler B42W46. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. 4. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 5. PPG:- 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 6. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 7. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer 528W200. 09900 - 14 PAINTING CITIBUS 1192-1 c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel. 1. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2. Fuller: 11OXX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235 5. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. D. Gypsum Drywall Systems: 1. Odorless Semigloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: White, interior, latex -based primer. 1. Devoe: 50801 Wonder -Tones Latex Primer and Sealer. 2. Fuller: Pro -Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer. 3. Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer. 4.- Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. 5. PPG: 6-2 Quick -Dry Latex Primer Sealer. 6. P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001. 7. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel. 1. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2. Fuller: 11OXX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 5. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. E. Woodwork and Hardboard: 1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats. a. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. PAINTING t 09900 - 15 CITIBUS 1192-1 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3. Glidden: 310 Glidden Wood Undercoat. 4. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody ##217. 5. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 6. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 7. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater G B49w200. b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, ^. odorless, alkyd enamel. 1. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2. Fuller: 11OXX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3. Glidden: -4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel ##235. -- 5. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. F. Stained Woodwork- u 1. Stained -Varnish Rubbed Finish: Three finish coats over stain plus filler on open -grain wood. Wipe filler before applying first varnish coat. t a. Stain Coat: Oil -type interior wood stain. 1. Devoe: 96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain. 2. Fuller: 640-XX Pen -Chrome Interior Oil Base Wood Stain. 3. Glidden: 1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain. .= 4. Moore: 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick Drying Sanding Sealer. 5. PPG: 77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base. 6. P & L: S-Series Tonetic Wood Stain. L 7. S-W: Oil Stain A-48 Series. b. First Coat: Cut shellac. '. 1. Devoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry Sealer. 2. Glidden: 5035 Ultra -Hide Sanding Sealer. 3. Moore: .413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick -Dry Sanding Sealer. 4. PPG: 77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer. 5. S-W: Pro -Mar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3. 09900 - 16 PAINTING I' CITIBUS 1192-1 c. Filler Coat: Paste wood filler. 1. Devoe: 4800 Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry Sealer. 2. Fuller: 680-00 Pen Chrome Paste Wood Filler. 3. Glidden: Glidden Paste Wood Filler. 4. Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238. 5. PPG: (none required) 6. S-W: Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler. d. Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish. 1. Devoe: 4600 Wonder Wood Satin Alkyd Satin Varnish. 2. Fuller: 653-01 EPA Compliant Clear Polyurethane Satin Finish. 3. Glidden: 82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane Varnish. 4. Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404. 5. PPG: 77-7 Rez Satin Varnish. 6. P & L: Clear Finish Gloss. 7. S-W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss'A66V91. G. Ferrous Metal: 1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Two Coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. PAINTING a. Primer: Synthetic, quick -drying, rust inhibiting primer. 1. Devoe: 2. Fuller: 3. Glidden: 4. 5. 6. 7. Moore: PPG: P & L: S-W: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red. 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast -Dry Metal Primer. Ironclad Retardo Rust -Inhibitive Paint #163. 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer. Effecto Rust -Inhibiting Primer. Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel . Undercoat. 3. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. 4. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 09900 - 17 CITIBUS 1192-1 5. PPG: 6. P & L: 7. S-W: c. Finish Coat: enamel. 1. Devoe: 2. Fuller: 3. Glidden : 4. Moore: 5. PPG: 6 P & L• 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. Interior Trim Primer. Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel ##235. 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. Ceilu-Tone Alk d Satin Enamel 7. S-W: y Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. H. Zinc -Coated Metal:-- 1. Semigloss Finish: Two coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer. 1. Devoe: 13201 Mirrolace Galvanized Metal Primer: 2. Fuller: 621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer. 3. Glidden:, 5229 Glid-Guard All Purpose Metal Primer. 4. Moore: Ironclad Galvanizes Metal Latex Primer #155. 5. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. 4. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. END OF SECTION 09900 09900 - 18 PAINTING F:. 6.4 CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION.10160 TOILET PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2.. SUMMARY: A. Extent of toilet partitions is indicated on drawings. B. Types of toilet compartments include: 1. Metal -- baked enamel finish. 2. Note that construction shall conform to ADA Regulations where indicated. 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication, and installation, including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet partition assemblies not fully described by product drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorage devices built into other work. C. Samples: Submit full range of color samples for each type of unit required. Submit 6" square samples of each color and finish on same substrate to be used in work, for color verification after selections have been made. 1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments within specified- tolerances where ever taking field measurements beforefabrication might delay work. TOILET PARTITIONS 10160 - 1 . I CITIBUS 1192-1 B. Coordination: Furnish .inserts"and'anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet partitions and related work; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Div., United States Gypsum Co. 2. American Sanitary Partition Corp. 3. Global Steel Products Corp. r- 4. Sanymetal Products Co. 5. Weis-Robart;Partitions, Inc. 2.2. MATERIALS: A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. B. Steel Sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM A 591, Class C, galvanized-bonderized, offollowingminimum thicknesses. 1. Pilasters (overhead -braced): 20 gage. 2. Pilasters (unbraced): 16 gage. _= 3. Panels and Screens: 20 gage. 4. Doors: 22 gage C. Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement: Minimum 12-gage galvanized steel sheet. D. Concealed Tapping Reinforcement: Minimum 14-gage galvanized steel sheet. E. Core Material for Metal Partitions: Manufacturer's standard ., sound -deadening honey comb of impregnated Kraft paper, in thickness to provide finished dimension of 1" minimum for doors, panels, and screens, 1-1/4" minimum for pilasters. 10160 - 2 TOILET PARTITIONS roll CITIBUS 1192-1 F. Brackets: Manufacturer's design for attaching panels to walls P and pilasters, shall be full height, continuous brackets. G. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy— duty operating hardware and accessories of chromium - plated non-ferrous cast alloy ("Zamac"). In lieu of manufacturer's standard hinges, provide continuous stainless steel hinges equal to Model FS-902 as manufactured by MARKAR Products, Inc. All toilet partition doors shall have surface mounted latches. H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chromium -plated steel, or brass k finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized, cadmium -plated, or other rust -resistant protective -coated steel. 2.3. FABRICATION: A. General: Furnish standard doors, unless otherwise indicated. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition -mounted hardware, accessories, as indicated. �+ B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24" wide inswinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 36" wide outswinging doors at stalls equipped for use by handicapped. 2.4. FINISHES: A. Baked Enamel Finish: 1. Clean galvanized steel surfaces after fabrication and before application of enamel coating system, to remove processing compounds, oils, and other contaminants. 2. Prime metal with baked -on rust inhibitive primer. 3. Apply two coats of thermosetting enamel finish, applied by electrostatic process, and baked in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. 4. Colors: Two of manufacturer's standard colors in each room, as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect. PART 3 .- EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: TOILET PARTITIONS 10160 - 3 CITIBUS 1192-1 A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. B. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel with overhead -brace when doors are in closed position. r, 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on inswing and outswinging doors to return to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials r, and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 10160 10160 - 4 :s V TOILET PARTITIONS CITIBUS 1192-1 SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES, PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following toilet accessory items: 1. Paper towel dispenser 2. Toilet tissue dispenser 3. Grab bar 4. Soap dispenser 5. Waste receptical G. Custodial shelf unit 7. Stainless steel framed mirror units. 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product Data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting, specified options, and finishes. C. Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. D.. Setting Drawings: Where cutouts are required in other work, provide templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and for installation of anchorage devices. 1.4. -QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 CITIBUS 1192-1 1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. 1.6. WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written 5- year warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors, agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible defects within warranty period.. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. PRODUCTS A. Provide accessories equal to standard units as listed herein. 1. Paper towel dispenser: equal to Bradley Model 2447. 2. Tissue Holder: equal to Bradley Model 5061; one holder for each new water closet. 3. Liquid Soap Dispenser: equal to Bradley Model 6304-67; a. One dispenser for each new lavatory. 4. Grab Bars: a. 1-1/2" stainless steel, 18 gauge with 1-1/4" clearance in 36 inch and 42 inch lengths as shown. 5. Waste Receptical: Swing top waste receptical equal to Bradley Model 377-38. 6. Custodial Shelf Unit: Equal to Bradley Model 9934. 7. Mirrors: Stainless steel frame, 1/4" glass with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating; sizes and locations as shown on plan. PART 3 - EXECUTION 10800 - 2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES r. A CITIBUS 1192-1 r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. 3.1. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces in. strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3